alstom pd521
Post on 04-Mar-2015
1.378 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
PD 521Distance Protection Device
Version -302 -401 -602-303 -402 -602
with Documentation forVersion -303 -402 -502
PD 521 Distance Protection Device
Version -302 -401 -602 Version -303 -402 -602
Update Documentation forVersion -303 -402 -502
2 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
! Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of theequipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use or improper use may endangerpersonnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used as connecting leads, wire end ferrules must be employed.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, properstorage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
Qualified Personnelare individuals who
� are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is beingconnected;
� are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized toenergize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
� are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
� are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
NoteThe operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning and operation. However, themanual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event ofquestions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate ALSTOMtechnical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of ALSTOM, including settlementof warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operatingmanual.
Update Documentation: Changes in Version -303 -402 -502
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN U-1
The special version -303 -402 -502 incorporates anextended operating frequency range for the voltagememory and the power swing blocking function in additionto the features and functions of the standard versions-302/-303 -401/-402 -602.
Distance Protection
Distance and Directional Measurement
The frequency range of the voltage memory is extended.The voltage memory is enabled, if the measuredfrequency satisfies the following condition:
0.95 f f 1.05 fnom nom� � � �
Power Swing Blocking
When power swing blocking is activated, a distance trip inzones 1 to 5 is prevented if there are power swings in thenetwork.
Three-pole distance protection starting with and withoutground initiates the start delay of the power swing blockingfunction. The start delay is intended to enable release inzone 1. After the settable start delay has elapsed, thedevice checks to determine whether the phase-to-phasevoltage 1VA-B is greater than 01. � Vnom . If this condition issatisfied, then the apparent power S is calculated from thequantities 1VA-B and IA-B . The amount of change inapparent power as referred to the apparent power at thatmoment is determined every 40 ms.
S1 S2S2
�
S1: apparent power at time t1S2: apparent power at time t1 + 40 ms
If the difference is greater than the set value, a blockingsignal is formed to block the distance trip for zones 1 to 5.This signal is extended by the settable release delay.
Power swing blocking is blocked if the monitoring functionof the voltage-measuring circuit operates.
U-1 Power swing blocking
The following figures show the formation of distancedecisions for the Zone 4 operating modes Normal, Section cable-line and Section line-cable.
These figures replace figures 29, 32 and 34 in the manualfor the standard versions.
Update Documentation: Changes in Version -303 -402 -502(continued)
U-2
U-2 Formation of distance decisions, with zone 4 operating normally
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Update Documentation: Changes in Version -303 -402 -502(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN U3
U-3 Formation of distance decisions, impedance zone 4: cable
Update Documentation: Changes in Version -303 -402 -502(continued)
U-4
U-4 Formation of distance decisions, impedance zone 4: line
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Update Documentation: Changes in Version -303 -402 -502(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN U5
The new Addresses related to the Power Swing Blocking function are as follows:
Setting parameters
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
14 50 PSB: Enabled on 0 0 / 1 no / yes14 52 PSB: Start delay on 0.20 0.06 ... 1.00 s 0.0114 53 PSB: Release delay on 0.20 0.06 ... 1.00 s 0.0114 54 PSB: Threshold value on 25 1 ... 50 % 1
State Signals
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
36 32 PSB: Blocking initiated - 0 / 1 no / yes36 58 PSB: Start delay running - 0 / 1 no / yes
These state signals can be assigned to binary outputs as well as to LED indicators.
Modifications After Going to Press
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 3
4 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Table of Contents
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 5
1 Application and Scope 7
2 Technical Data 82.1 Conformity Statement 82.2 General Data 82.3 Tests 82.3.1 Type Tests 82.3.2 Routine Tests 92.4 Environmental Conditions 92.5 Inputs and Outputs 102.6 Interfaces 102.7 Information Output 112.8 Settings 112.9 Typical Characteristics 112.10 Deviations 112.11 Power Supply 12
3 Operation 133.1 Modular Structure 133.2 Man-Machine Communication 133.3 Distance Protection 143.3.1 Starting 163.3.2 Selection of Measured Variables 243.3.3 Distance and Directional Measurement 253.3.4 Impedance-Time Characteristics 343.4 Measuring Circuit Monitoring 423.5 Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection
(BUOC or Backup DTOC)46
3.6 Switch on to Fault Protection 473.7 Protective Signaling 483.8 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 563.9 Ground Fault Direction Determination
Using Steady-State Values56
3.9.1 GFD Evaluation (Ground Fault Direction) 573.9.2 GF Evaluation (Ground Fault) 613.9.3 Ground Fault Data Acquisition 623.10 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic 653.11 Overcurrent Signal 673.12 Operating Data Measurement 683.13 Fault Recording 713.13.1 Fault Logging 733.13.2 Measured Fault Data 733.13.3 Fault Data Acquisition 773.14 Self-Monitoring and Fault Diagnosis 783.15 Serial Interfaces 793.15.1 PC Interface 803.15.2 ILSA Interface 81
4 Design 82
5 Installation and Connection 845.1 Unpacking and Packing 845.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type 845.3 Location Requirements 845.4 Installation 855.5 Protective and System Grounding 875.6 Connection 875.6.1 Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 875.6.2 Binary Control Inputs 935.6.3 Tripping and Signaling Circuits 935.6.4 PC Interface 935.6.5 ILSA Interface 93
6 Control 946.1 Display and Keyboard 946.2 Address Selection 956.3 Change-Enabling Function 956.4 Changing Settings 966.5 Memory Readout 976.5.1 Signal Memory Readout 976.5.2 Monitoring Signal Memory Readout 996.6 Resetting 1006.7 Password-Protected Control Operations 1016.8 Keyboard Lock 102
7 Settings 1037.1 Device Identification 1037.1.1 Ordering Information 1037.1.2 Design Version 1047.2 Configuration Parameters 1047.2.1 Control Interfaces 1047.2.2 Binary Inputs 1067.2.3 Binary Outputs 1067.2.4 LED Indicators 1077.3 Function Parameters 1077.3.1 Global 1077.3.2 Main Functions 1087.3.3 Supplementary Functions 111
8 Information and Control Functions 1168.1 Measured Values 1168.2 State Signals 1188.3 Counters 1198.4 Control and Testing 120
Table of Contents(continued)
6 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602/-502 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
9 Commissioning 122
10 Troubleshooting 137
11 Maintenance 140
12 Storage 143
13 Accessories and Spare Parts 144
14 Ordering Information 145
Appendix 147
7
PD 521 distance protection devices are used for selectiveshort-circuit protection in high-voltage systems.
The systems can be operated with impedance grounding,with ground fault compensation or with isolated neutral.
The PD 521, a single-system distance protection device,has the following protective functions:
� Overcurrent fault detection logic with optionalundervoltage fault detection logic
� Underimpedance fault detection logic with load blinding
� Distance measurement with selection of polygonal orcircular characteristic
� Four distance stages, including one that can be usedas a special stage
� Six timer stages, including two that act as backup timerstages
� Direction voltage memory
� Circuit breaker failure protection
� Switch on to fault protection
� Backup overcurrent time protection (Backup DTOC)
� Protective signaling (teleprotection)
� Ground fault direction determination using steady-statevalues
Besides the functions listed above, as well as measuringcircuit monitoring and comprehensive self-monitoring, thefollowing functions are always available in the PD 521 foroptimum fault evaluation and system management:
� Measuring circuit monitoring
� Operating data measurement
� Event counting
� Ground fault data acquisition
� Time-tagged fault logging
� Fault data acquisition (including fault localization)
� Fault recording
The PD 521 has a multifunctional case design that isequally well suited to either wall surface mounting or flushpanel mounting due to the reversible terminal blocks andadjustable mounting brackets. The auxiliary voltage forthe power supply can be switched internally from110-250 V DC or 100-230V AC to 24-60 V DC.
The PD 521 has the following inputs and outputs:
� 4 current-measuring and 3 voltage-measuring inputs
� 2 binary signal inputs (optical couplers) with freelyconfigurable function assignment
� 8 output relays with freely configurable functionassignment
Control and display:
� Local control panel
� 12 LED indicators, 9 of which allow freely configurablefunction assignment
� PC interface
� Optional ILSA interface
Information is exchanged either through the integratedlocal control panel, the integrated PC interface or theoptional ILSA interface.
The optional ILSA interface provides a system interfacefor serial link-up of the numerical protection device to acentral protection control unit or to a central substationcontrol system.
1 Application and Scope
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
8 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
2.1 Conformity Statement
Applicable to the PD 521, version302-402/403/404-604
Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.
The product designated as "PD 521 Distance ProtectionDevice" has been developed and manufactured inconformity with the international standard EN 60255-6 andin accordance with the EMC Directive and the LowVoltage Directive issued by the European Community.
2.2 General Data
DesignCase suitable for surface or flush mounting
Installation positionVertical ± 30°
Degree of device protectionIP 51 according to DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 orIEC 529
WeightApprox. 4.0 kg
Dimensions and connectionsSee Dimensional Drawings and Terminal ConnectionDiagrams
PC interfaceConnector DIN 41 652, type D-Sub, 9-pinA special connecting cable is required for electricalisolation.
ILSA Interface (optional)Optical fibers (-X7 and -X8): optical fiber interface F-SMA.Leads (-X9): Mini Combicon MC 1.5/5-STF-3.81 for wirecross-sections up to 1.5 mm2 flexible.
ConnectionsThreaded terminal ends M4,self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross-sections from 0.5 mm² to 6 mm² or 2 � 2.5 mm²
Creepage distances and clearancesPer EN 61010-1§ or IEC 664-1Pollution degree 3, working voltage 300 Vovervoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV
2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
All tests according to EN 60255-6§ andDIN 57 435 Part 303
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Interference suppressionAccording to EN 55022 and DIN VDE 0878 Part 3,class B
1 MHz burst disturbance testAccording to IEC 255§ Part 22-1, class IIICommon mode test voltage: 2.5 kVDifferential test voltage: 1.0 kVTest duration: > 2 sSource impedance: 200 �
Immunity to electrostatic dischargeAccording to EN 60801§ Part 2, severity level 3Contact discharge,Single discharges: > 10Holding time: > 5 sTest voltage: 6 kVTest generator: 50 to 100 M�, 150 pF/330 �
Immunity to radiated electromagnetic energyAccording to ENV 50140§, level 3Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sidesTest field strength, frequ. band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V/mTest using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz / 100 %
Electrical fast transient / burst requirementsAccording to IEC 801-4, test severity level 3Rise time of one pulse: 5 nsImpulse duration (50% value): 50 nsAmplitude: 2 kV / 1 kVBurst duration: 15 msBurst period: 300 msSource impedance: 50 �
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 9
Surge immunity testAccording to IEC 1000-4-5, test level 3Testing of power supply circuits,unsymmetrically / symmetrically operated linesOpen-circuit voltage front time // time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 �sShort-circuit current front time // time to half-value: 8 / 20 �sAmplitude: 1 / 2 kVPulse frequency: > 5 / minSource impedance: 12 / 42 �
Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radiofrequency fieldsAccording to IEC 65A/77B (Sec) 145/110, test level 2Disturbing test voltage: 3 V
Power frequency magnetic field immunityAccording to EN 61000-4-8§, level 4Frequency: 50 HzTest field strength: 30 A/m
Interruptions to and alternating component (ripple) ind.c. auxiliary energizing quantity of measuring relaysAccording to IEC 255-1112% / 50 ms
Insulation
Voltage testAccording to IEC 255-52 kV AC, 60 sFor the voltage test of the power supply inputs, directvoltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used.The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltagetest.
Impulse voltage withstand testAccording to IEC 255-5Front time: 1.2 µsTime to half-value: 50 µsPeak value: 5 kVSource impedance: 500 �
Mechanical Robustness
Vibration testAccording to IEC 255-21-1§, test severity class 1Frequency range, in operation:10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm,60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 gFrequency range, during transport:10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock response and withstand test, bump testAccording to IEC 255-21-2§, test severity class 1Acceleration: 5 g/15 gPulse duration: 11 ms
Seismic testAccording to EN 60255-21-3§, test procedure A, class 15 to 8 Hz, 3.5/1.5 mm,8 to 35 Hz, 10/5 m/s2
3 � 1 cycle
2.3.2 Routine Tests
All tests according to EN 60255-6§ andDIN 57 435 Part 303
Additional thermal test100 % controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded
2.4 Environmental Conditions
Allowable ambient temperaturesOperating temp.:- 5 °C to + 55 °C (+ 23 °F to + 131 °F)Storage temp.:- 25 °C to + 55 °C (- 13 °F to + 131 °F)Shipping temp.:- 25 °C to + 70 °C (- 13 °F to + 158 °F)
Ambient humidity rangeRelative humidity to preclude any condensation;45 to 75 % (annual mean),up to 56 days at � 95% and 40°C (104 °F)
____________________________________________
Key:§ For this EN, ENV or IEC standard, the DIN EN, DINVENV or DIN IEC edition, respectively, was used in the test.
2 Technical Data(continued)
10 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
Measurement Inputs
CurrentConnection to current transformers
Nominal current Inom (per order): 1 A AC or 5 A AC
Load rating, continuous: 4 Inomfor 10 s: 30 Inomfor 1 s: 100 Inom
Rated surge current: 250 Inom
Nominal consumption: < 0.3 VA per phase at Inom
VoltageConnection to voltage transformers
Nominal voltage Vnom: 100 V ACSuitable for connection to transformers withVnom = 100 to 130 V AC
Load rating, continuous: 1.5 Vnom
Nominal consumption: < 0.3 VA per phase at Vnom
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz or 60 Hz (settable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Dynamic range
For the three phase currents at 1 A or 5 A: 100 InomFor the residual current at 1 A or 5 A: 10 Inom
Binary Inputs (Optical Couplers)
Function assignment and connections:see address list (Appendix C) and terminal connectiondiagrams (Appendix E)
Fitted: 2 optical couplers, both freely configurable
Nominal input voltage Vin,nom: 24 to 250 V DC
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 Vin,nomwith residual ripple of up to 12% of Vin,nom
Current consumption per input:Vin = 19…110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30%Vin > 110 V DC: 5 mA ± 30%
Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
Number, function assignment and connections:see address list (Appendix C) and terminal connectiondiagrams (Appendix E)
Fitted: 8 output relays, all freely configurable
Contact load rating:- Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC- Continuous current: 5 A- Short-time current: 30 A for 0.5 s- Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms- Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC, L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 220 V AC, cos � = 0.4
2.6 Interfaces
Local control panelInput and output of protection data:via six keys and two four-digit displaysState and fault indications:12 LED indicators(3 permanently assigned, 9 freely configurable)
Function assignment:see address list (Appendix C)
PC interfaceTransmission rate:300 to 9600 Baud (adjustable)
For connection to a PC, a special connection cable isrequired (see Accessories).
ILSA interface (optional)Per IEC 60870-5-103Transmission rate:50 to 19,200 Baud (adjustable)
Plastic fiber connectionoptical wave length: typ. 655 nmdistance to be bridged: max. 45 m
Glass fiber connection G 50/125 or G 62.5/125optical wave length: typ. 820 nmdistance to be bridged: max. 2000 m
Wire leadsper RS 485, 2kV-isolationdistance to be bridged: max. 1200 m
2 Technical Data(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 11
2.7 Information Output
Counters, measured data and indications:see address list (Appendix C)
Time-Tagged Fault Logging
Up to 5 faults are stored, then the oldest fault is erased.
Up to 64 signals per fault can be stored, subsequentsignals trigger the overflow indication.
Fault counting: 0 to 9999.
Time-tagging: Date and time are assigned via an internalclock.
Fault Data Acquisition
Phase currents IA, IB, IC: to 100 Inom (IN is calculated at output)Phase-to-ground voltages VA-G, VB-G, VC-G: to 1 Vnom (VN-G is calculated at output)
Resolution for sampled values � 6% dynamic range:for Inom = 1 A : 6.1 mA (r.m.s.)for Inom = 5 A, : 30.5 mA or 6.1 mV (r.m.s.)
Resolution for sampled values > 6% dynamic rangefor Inom = 1 A : 97.6 mA (r.m.s.)for Inom = 5 A, : 488 mA or 97.6 mV (r.m.s.)
Time resolution: 2 ms
Fault logging periodPre-fault period: 10 to 100 msPost-fault period: 10 to 250 msFor a single fault, recording ceases after 4.35 s / 3.33 s(including the pre- and post-fault periods) at a nominalfrequency of 50 Hz / 60 Hz.The maximum recording period of 4.35 s / 3.33 s can bedivided between up to 5 faults.For a recording period in excess of 4.35 s / 3.33 s, theanalog data of the oldest fault are erased; for a number offaults in excess of five, all data of the oldest fault areerased.
Self-monitoringUp to 30 monitoring signals can be stored.
2.8 Settings
Settings, ranges and increments:see address list (Appendix C)
2.9 Typical Characteristics
Min. starting time: 25 ms
Starting reset time: 30 ms ± 10 ms
Directional sensitivity up to 2 s after general start: �
beginning 2 s after general start and with switch on tofault: 200 mV ± 20%
Shortest command time: 35 ms
Minimum trip command output time: 100 ms
Reset ratio for starting and measurement: 0.95
2.10 Deviations
Deviations relative to the set value with sinusoidalmeasured variables, total harmonic distortion � 2%,ambient temperature 20°C and nominal auxiliary voltageVA,nom.
Distance Protection
Fault detector I>, IN>Setting <0,2 Inom: Deviation: ± 5%Setting >0,2 Inom: Deviation: ± 3%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 0.5%Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 0.5%
Fault detector I>>Deviation: ± 3%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 0.5%Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 0.5%
Fault detector V<, VN-G>, VN-G>>Deviation: ± 3%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 0.5%Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 2.0%
Impedance measurement Z<Deviation at �sh = 0°, 90°: ± 3%Deviation at �sh = 30°, 60°: ± 5%
Direction determinationDeviation: ± 3°Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 1°Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 8°
2 Technical Data(continued)
12 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Backup Overcurrent Time Protection (Backup DTOC)
Threshold operate value I>Deviation: ± 3%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 1%Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 0.2%
Ground Fault Direction DeterminationUsing Steady-State Values
Threshold operate values and sector anglesDeviation: ± 3% or 1 °Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 1% or 1°Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 5% or 2°
Measuring Circuit Monitoring
Threshold operate values Ineg, VnegDeviation: ± 3%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 1%
Timer stages
Deviation: ± 10 ms or 3%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 1%
Operating Data Measurement
Deviations relative to the relevant nominal value withsinusoidal measured variables, total harmonic distortion �2%, ambient temperature 20°C and nominal auxiliaryvoltage VA,nom.
Current, voltageDeviation: ± 3%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 1%Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 0.2%
Active and reactive powerDeviation: ± 11%Influence at 20°C ± 20 K: ± 7%Influence at fnom ± 5%: ± 6%
Load angle �Deviation: ± 2°
Fault Localization
Deviation: ± 5%
Internal Clock
With free-running internal clockDeviation: < 1 min/month
With synchronization via DCF77 clockDeviation: < 10 ms
2.11 Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom24 to 60 V DC / 110 to 250 V DC, 100 to 230 V AC 1(selectable using internal plug-in jumper)
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nomwith residual ripple of up to 12% VA,nom
fnom: 50 Hz / 60 Hz 2
Nominal consumption at VA,nom = 220 V DC:8 / 10 W (VA) (initial condition / operated condition)
Start-up peak current for a duration of 0.25 ms: < 13 A
1 Factory setting underlined
2 For AC voltage supply
3 Operation
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 13
3.1 Modular Structure
The PD 521, a numerical protection device, is one of thepieces of instrumentation in Subsystem P of the IntegratedProtection and Control System for Substations (ILS). Thedevices that are part of this system are built from identicaluniform hardware modules. Figure 1 shows the basichardware structure of the PD 521 distance protectiondevice.
1 Basic hardware structure
The input transformers and optical couplers convert theexternal analog and binary variables - electrically isolated -to the internal processing levels. Commands and signalsgenerated within the device are accessible via floatingcontacts. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to thepower supply module which provides the voltages requiredinternally.
3.2 Man-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange ofinformation between operator and device:
� Integrated local control panel
� PC interface
� ILSA interface
Each piece of information and each parameter is codedwith an ‘address’ consisting of two two-digit decimalnumbers x and y. Changing x or y allows selection of anydesired address for display or where necessarymodification of the information stored at that address.(Please refer to Chapter 6.)
The addresses are standardized for all systems with theadvantage that the same information is coded with thesame address in each device type. The entire addressrange is divided into the following three groups:
� Parameters:This group contains all set values including the deviceidentification data, the configuration parameters foradapting the device interfaces to the system and thefunction parameters for adapting the protective functionto the process. All values of this group are stored in anon-volatile memory, that is the values will bepreserved even if the power supply fails.
� Operation:This group includes all information relevant foroperation, such as measured operating values andbinary signal states. This information is updatedperiodically and consequently is not stored. In addition,various control parameters are grouped here, forexample those for resetting counters, memories anddisplays.
� Events:The third group is reserved for the recording of events.Hence all information contained in this group is stored.In particular the start/end signals during a fault, themeasured fault data as well as sampled fault recordsare stored here and can be read out at a later time.
The appendix, section C, documents the addresses of thenumerical protection device PD 521. This address list iscomplete and thus contains all addresses used with thePD 521.
3 Operation(continued)
14 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.3 Distance Protection
The secondary phase currents and voltages of the systemtransformer are fed to the PD 521 and – electricallyisolated – are converted to normalized electronics levels.The analog quantities are digitized and are thus availablefor further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities areconverted by the PD 521 to nominal quantities. Thenominal current of the PD 521 must be set for thispurpose.
The connection arrangement of the distance protectionmeasuring circuit on the PD 521 must be set. (Figure 2shows the standard connection.) The phase of thedigitized phase current is rotated 180° by this setting.
From these currents (IA, IB and IC) the phase-to-phasecurrents IA-B, IB-C and IC-A are formed.
The current with the highest magnitude (IP,max) and thecurrent with the intermediate magnitude (IP,med) aredetermined from the phase currents.
The ground current 1IN is calculated by summation of IA, IBand IC.
The phase-to-phase voltages 1VA-B, 1VB-C and 1VC-A areformed from the digitized phase-to-ground voltages1VA-G, 1VB-G and 1VC-G and the neutral displacementvoltage 1VN-G.
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 15
2 Conditioning the measured data
3 Operation(continued)
16 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.3.1 Fault Detection Logic
The purpose of distance protection fault detection logic isphase-selective short-circuit detection. Fault detectionlogic is divided into the following areas:
� Overcurrent detection
� Ground fault detection
� Undervoltage detection
� Underimpedance detection
The fault detection decisions of the individual areas arelinked by fault detection logic.
Short-circuit currents that are greater than the maximumoperating load currents can be detected by overcurrentdetection logic. Undervoltage detection logic is providedfor short circuits that cannot be detected by overcurrentdetection logic. Ground fault detection logic distinguishesbetween grounded and ungrounded faults.
The fault detection logic function starts the timer stages ofthe trigger levels and – as a function of the phase-selective fault detection decision – selects the measuringloop in which the fault impedance is determined. Faultdetection logic is blocked in the following cases:
� if protection is disabled from the local control panel orthrough appropriately configured binary signal inputs;
� if measuring-circuit monitoring detects a fault in thevoltage-measuring circuit.
Protection can only be deactivated or activated throughbinary signal inputs if the M A I N : D e a c t i v a t e p r o t .E X T and M A I N : A c t i v a t e p r o t . E X T functionsare both configured. When only one or neither of the twofunctions is configured, this is interpreted as “Protectionexternally activated.” If the triggering signals of the binarysignal inputs are implausible, as for example when theyboth have a logic value of “1,” then the last plausible stateremains stored in memory.
3 Fault detection blocking
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 17
Overcurrent Detection Logic
Overcurrent detection logic monitors the phase currentsfor values in excess of the threshold values I>> and I>>>.The I>> threshold can be set. I>>> is 2 � ��I . Thethresholds are identical for all three phases.
The output signals of the I>> trigger assume a logic valueof "1" if the threshold is exceeded in two consecutive half-waves. Overcurrent detection is delayed by the set timetI>> if the current is below 5 � I>>. Thereby, false faultdetection decisions caused by inrush currents onswitching can be suppressed for lines with connectedtransformers. In the case of the I>>> trigger only one half-wave must exceed the threshold for the output signals toassume a logic value of "1."
If I>> is exceeded in one phase, then it is sufficient forovercurrent detection if I>>> is exceeded in the otherphases. In this case the fault detection time is shortenedsince there is no longer any need to wait for the secondhalf-wave.
Evaluation of the trigger decisions is a function of the typeof neutral-point treatment set in the PD 521. If isolated-neutral/resonant-grounded or short-time grounding isset, then I>> overcurrent detection occurs in the phase(s)in which the I>> threshold is exceeded. With the settingimpedance-grounded the following condition must also besatisfied:
I IP� �
23 ,max
4 Overcurrent detection logic
3 Operation(continued)
18 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Ground fault detection logic monitors the averagemagnitude of the ground current 1IN and the neutral-pointdisplacement voltage 1VN-G for values exceeding setthresholds.
5% of the current maximum phase current is added to theset threshold IN>, which means that the operate value ofthe ground current function increases with an increasingphase current level as a form of stabilization.
5 Monitoring the ground current 1IN and the neutral-point displacement voltage 1VN-G
Ground Fault Detection Logic
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 19
The ground fault detection mode is a function of theneutral-point treatment set in the PD 521.
� M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t ( m e n t )Low impedance-groundingGround fault starting SG occurs with this setting whenthe threshold of the IN> or VN-G> trigger is exceeded.
� M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t ( m e n t )Isolated neutral/resonant-groundingIf the setting isolated neutral/resonant-grounding isselected, instantaneous starting SG occurs when thereis multiple phase-to-ground fault detection if thethreshold value of the IN> or VN-G> trigger is exceeded.
Even in the case of a single-phase fault, that is, in theevent that only one base point is detected, ground faultstarting will occur, but not until tIN> has elapsed.
� M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t ( m e n t )Short-duration groundingOperation in this mode corresponds to operation withthe setting isolated neutral/resonant-grounding exceptthat timer stage tIN> is started when the IN> or VN-G>trigger operates. In the case of a sustained groundfault the timer stage tIN> remains in the elapsed statedue to the operating trigger VN-G>>. If the ground faultchanges to a phase-to-ground fault then ground faultstarting operates without delay when the threshold ofthe IN> or VN-G> trigger is exceeded.
6 Evaluation of trigger signals
3 Operation(continued)
20 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Ground Fault Starting Signals
Signals are derived from ground fault detection triggerdecisions. If neutral-point treatment is set for Lowimpedance-grounding, then the following signals areissued:
� When VN-G>> is exceeded,S T A R T : V N - G > > t r i g g e r e d is signaled.
� By selecting the appropriate setting the user canspecify whether a “trip” should occur after the timerstage tVN-G>> has elapsed.
With the settings Isolated neutral/resonant-grounding orShort-duration grounding the M A I N : G r o u n d f a u l tsignal is issued after tVN-G>> elapses (see Figure 6) if thereis no multi-phase starting.
7 Ground fault starting signals
Enabling Undervoltage and UnderimpedanceDetection Logic
Undervoltage and underimpedance detection logic areenabled by I>(Imin) in the corresponding measuringsystems. In order to control contention problems whencurrent and voltage appear at the same time (branchvoltage transformers), enabling of the measuring systemsis delayed by 15 ms.
In isolated-neutral systems or resonant-groundedsystems, one of the two phases may carry just a smallload current falling below the base point current I>(Imin).In this case, the undervoltage decisions are enabled if theV< condition is met in two phases whereas the I>condition is satisfied in one phase only. This extendedenabling logic will operate only for the neutral-pointtreatment settings Isol./reson. w. start. P-G and Short-duration grounding.
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 21
8 Enabling undervoltage and underimpedance detection logic
3 Operation(continued)
22 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Undervoltage Detection Logic
Undervoltage detection logic monitors the phase-to-ground voltages or the phase-to-phase voltages todetermine whether they fall below the set threshold V<.
Operation of undervoltage detection can be determinedthrough selection of the operating mode. The followingmodes are possible:
� Undervoltage detection logic is deactivated.
� Undervoltage detection logic evaluates only thedecisions of the phase-to-ground loops, once thesefunctions have been enabled by ground fault detection.
� Ground fault detection brings about a switch fromphase-to-phase to phase-to-ground loops.
If the following – contradictory – setting combination hasbeen selected, namely
� M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t ( m e n t )Isol./reson. w/o start P-G and
� S T A R T : O p e r a t ( i n g ) m o d e With V</Z< starting P-G,
then when ground starting SG occurs, the phase-to-phaseloops are always enabled. If no ground starting occurs,then the undervoltage detection function is blocked.
9 Undervoltage detection logic
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 23
Underimpedance Detection Logic
Underimpedance detection logic determines theimpedances of the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phaseloops.
Operation of underimpedance detection logic – as well asundervoltage detection logic – can be controlled throughselection of the operating mode. The following modes arepossible:
� Both the underimpedance and undervoltage detectionlogic are disabled.
� The underimpedance and undervoltage detectionfunctions evaluate only the decisions of the phase-to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabledby ground fault detection logic.
� Ground fault detection brings about a switch fromphase-to-phase to phase-to-ground loops.
If, as a special case, the following – contradictory –settingcombination has been selected, namely
� M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t ( m e n t )"Isol./reson. w/o start P-G" and
� S T A R T : O p e r a t ( i n g ) m o d e “With V</Z< starting P-G",
then when ground starting SG occurs, the phase-to-phaseloops are always enabled. If no ground starting occurs,then the undervoltage and underimpedance detectionfunctions are blocked.
All underimpedance detection measuring loops areblocked when the trigger I>>> operates (see ‘Overcurrentdetection logic’). When overcurrent or undervoltagedetection logic operates, the corresponding measuringloops are blocked phase-selectively.
If measurement is enabled, the loop impedance isdetermined and compared to ascertain that it is within theset impedance range. The loop impedance of the phase-to-ground loops is determined, depending on the setting,by using the ground current corrected by the set groundfactor kG or by using twice the phase current.
The following values must be set in order to determine theunderimpedance detection characteristic:
� Reactance in the forward direction: Xfw
� Load angle �
� Ratio Zbw/Zfw(Impedance in backward direction: Zbw
Impedance in forward direction: Zfw)
� Phase-to-ground resistance in forward direction:Rfw P-G
� Phase-to-phase resistance in forward direction:Rfw P-P
If, on the basis of the settings, the reach in the backwarddirection is greater than 3 �Znom , then the range is limitedto 3 �Znom ( Z V Inom nom nom� / ).
10 Characteristic of the underimpedance detection function
3 Operation(continued)
24 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
11 Enabling underimpedance detection logic
12 Underimpedance detection logic
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 25
Fault Detection Logic
The fault detection logic links the phase-selective outputsignals from
� Overcurrent detection logic (I>>)
� Ground fault detection logic
� Undervoltage detection logic (V<)
� Underimpedance detection logic (Z<)
to form common phase-selective starting decisions SA, SB,SC and SN1. The decisions SA, SB and SC are combined toform "distance protection starting" – and thus theS T A R T : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g signal. Ground startingalone does not bring about general starting.
In the case of starting via overcurrent detection logic,single-phase starting without ground may occur. In orderfor the measured values for distance and directionalmeasurement to be properly selected even in this case,either SN1 starting or starting in another phase must betriggered as well. It is possible to specify whether in thecase of single-phase starting, SN1 starting will always betripped or whether – depending on the magnitude of thephase currents – SN1 or starting in one phase shall betransfer-tripped.
� M A I N : T r a n s f e r f o r 1 pGroundWith single-phase overcurrent detection logic, SN1 isstarted and transfer-tripped after the timer stage tIN>has elapsed (see "ground fault detection logic" forsetting).
If starting changes from single-phase overcurrentstarting without ground to multi-phase starting orsingle-phase-to-ground starting, starting occursinstantaneously.
� M A I N : T r a n s f e r f o r 1 pP or G = f(IP,med , IP,max)The decision as to whether starting in one phase orSN1 starting will be tripped is derived from the ratioI IP med P, ,max/ . The magnitude of the medium phasecurrent must be more than 2/3 the magnitude of themaximum current so that the phase is transfer-tripped.If the current with the medium-sized magnitude issmaller, SN1 will be tripped after the timer stage tIN>has elapsed.
If starting switches from single-phase overcurrentstarting without ground to multi-phase starting orsingle-phase-to-ground starting, starting will beinstantaneous.
3 Operation(continued)
26 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
13 Fault detection logic
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 27
3.3.2 Selection of Measured Variables
The PD 521 selects a measuring loop based on thephase-selective fault detection decision and the selectedphase priority. The short-circuit impedance and faultdirection are determined from this measuring loop’svoltage and current.
In the case of three-phase fault detection, either groundedor ungrounded, the minimum voltage of the phase-to-phase voltages and the associated phase-to-phasecurrent are selected as measured variables. In the caseof double-phase-to-ground fault detection, the set phasepriority is the determining factor for selecting themeasured variables.
14 Selection of measured variables
3 Operation(continued)
28 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.3.3 Distance and Directional Measurement
The PD 521 determines the fault impedance and the faultdirection on the basis of the selected measured variables.A voltage memory is available so that measurement willfunction correctly, even with very low fault voltages.
Voltage Memory
The voltage 1VA-B is the reference voltage for the voltagememory. If the voltage exceeds the default value of0.65 Vnom and if there is no "distance protection starting,"then the voltage memory is synchronized.Synchronization requires approximately 100 ms. Then acheck is carried out to determine whether the frequencysatisfies the following condition:
0 99 101. .� � � �f f fnom nom.
If the condition is satisfied, the voltage memory is enabled.The frequency condition is checked in cycles at intervalsof approximately 10 ms. As soon as the condition is nolonger satisfied, the enable is canceled.
If the magnitude of the reference voltage drops below0.65 Vnom or if “distance protection starting” occurs,synchronization of the voltage memory is terminated. Thevoltage memory is then free-running and remains enabledfor 2 s.
15 Storage of reference voltage in memory
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 29
Angle Determination
When "distance protection starting" occurs, the angles �Fand �S are determined.
Angle �F is the fault angle that is determined using theselected measuring voltage Vmeas and the selectedmeasuring current Imeas. In order for the fault angle �F toalso be reliably determined in the event of arcing faults,only the fundamental wave of the measuring voltage isused for angle measurement.
Angle �S is determined on the basis of the voltage storedin memory and the selected measuring current Imeas.Since the frequency of the stored voltage can differ fromthe nominal frequency, a phase correction must be made.This correction is determined by the frequency deviationand the time that has elapsed since synchronization wasterminated. Furthermore, an angle correction as afunction of the selected measuring loop and the M A I N :R o t a r y f i e l d setting is necessary. The resultingangle �X is used for further processing.
16 Angle determination
3 Operation(continued)
30 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
For distance and directional measurement the followingangles are used – as a function of the magnitude of theselected measuring voltage and the fault duration:
� the fault angle �F,
� the angle �X,
� the set angle �.
Directional Measurement
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas is greater than0.15 Vnom when the fault occurs, then the direction isdetermined using the fault angle �F. In the case of ameasuring voltage of less than 0.15 Vnom, theangle �X is used for directional determination. If thevoltage memory is not enabled, the angle �X cannot bedetermined. In this case a check is made to determinewhether the measuring voltage Vmeas is in the range200 mV < Vmeas < 0.15 Vnom. If this is not the case,
direction is determined using the fault angle �F.Directional determination using �X or �F is not possible ifthe voltage memory is not enabled or if the measuringvoltage is less than 200 mV. In these cases the setangle � is used for directional measurement, which meansthat a decision is made in favor of the forward direction.
Angle for Directional Determination
V. memory 0 002 015. .� � � �V V Vnom meas nom V Vmeas nom� �0 002.
Enabled �X �X
Not enabled �F �
A decision is made for forward direction if the angleselected for directional determination is in the range� �� � � �45 135� . In the case of angles outside this rangea decision is made for the backward direction.
17 Directional measurement
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 31
Distance Measurement
For distance measurement, the user may select apolygonal or circular characteristic by way of the settingDIST: Character ist ic .
18 Selecting the characteristic
The angle that is used to calculate fault impedance isselected according to the following criteria:
� If the measuring voltage Vmeas is greater than 0.15 Vnomwhen the fault occurs, then fault angle �F is used tocalculate fault impedance.
� If the fault voltages are less than 0.15 Vnom and thevoltage memory is enabled, a check is made todetermine whether angles �F and �X are in the forwarddirection (-45° < � < +135°).
� If both angles are in the same direction, eitherforward or backward, then fault angle �F is selectedfor distance measurement.
� If angle �F is in the forward direction and angle �X isin the backward direction, then an angle of 180° + �is specified for the calculation.
� If angle �X is in the forward direction and angle �F isin the backward direction, the set angle � is usedfor distance measurement.
19 Selecting the angle for the impedance calculation
3 Operation(continued)
32 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
� If the voltage memory is not enabled, a check is madeto determine
� whether the measuring voltage Vmeas is in the range200 mV < Vmeas < 0.15 Vnom. If so, fault angle �F isselected for the impedance calculation;
� whether the selected measuring voltage Vmeas isless than 200 mV. If so, the set angle � is used forthe impedance calculation.
The angle � can be set separately for the ‘polygon’and ‘circle’ characteristics.
DIST: Characteristic “Polygon“
The fault impedance value ZF is determined using theselected measuring quantities Vmeas and Imeas. Bymultiplication by the cosine or sine of the angle selectedfor distance measurement �Z, we then calculate the faultresistance RF or fault reactance XF.
20 Impedance measurement with the polygonal characteristic
The calculated quantities RF and XF are compared with thereference quantities Rref and Xref of the four impedancezones. The reference quantities are determined using thesettings for determining the impedance zone(s). If bothquantities lie within the set impedance zone(s), a distancedecision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
The impedance zones are determined by the followingsettings:
� Reactance X
� Resistance R, separately for phase-to-ground andphase-to-phase loops
� Angle �
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain thecharacteristic shown in Figure 21.
21 PD 521 impedance and directional characteristics for the setting “Polygon“
Example for: Xn = 6.5 �Rn = 2.0 ��n = 70°n = 1 to 4
Dot-dash line: kze = 1.2(adjustable in zone 1 only)
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 33
The resistances for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phaseloops can be set separately for each zone. The differentimpedances are therefore compared with differentimpedance characteristics.
In addition to the settings described above, the zoneextension factors kze can be set separately for phase-to-ground (P-G) and phase-to-phase (P-P) loops forimpedance zone 1.
As a result of this setting, impedance zone 1 is extendedor reduced accordingly in the R and X directions. Thusthe R and X values modified by the zone extensionfactor kze are calculated according to the followingformulas:
R k Rkze ze1 1, � �
X k Xkze ze1 1, � �
If, as a consequence of the settings kze, a wider reachthan 200 � at Inom � 1A or 40 � at Inom � 5 A results inR- or X-direction, then the reach is automatically limited to200 � or 40 �, respectively.
The increase in reach by the zone extension factorkze HSR is controlled by
� protective signaling (PSIG: Z o n e e x t . );
� switch on to fault protection(S O T F : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n );
� an external signal(D I S T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
22 Setting impedance zones 2 to 4 and distance measurement
3 Operation(continued)
34 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
23 Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 35
DIST: Characteristic “Circle“
The fault impedance value ZF is determined using theselected measuring quantities Vmeas and Imeas. If the setting“Arc compensation: yes “ has been chosen then, forangles of � �� �45 � �Z and 135 180�� � � �� �Z ( ) , acorrection to the measured fault impedance is calculatedas follows:
ZZ
F corrF
, sin�
�1 �
In the range � �� �45 � �Z the following relation holds:� � �� � Z
In the range 135 180�� � � �� �Z ( ) we have:� � �� � � �Z 180
The calculated impedance Z meas is compared with theset impedance in the four impedance zones. If themeasured impedance is smaller than or equal to the setimpedance, then a distance decision of the correspondingzone(s) is taken.
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in Figure 24is obtained. If the characteristic were to be measured withsine variables for the setting “Arc compensation: yes", thedot-dashed line would be obtained.
24 PD 521 impedance and directional characteristics for the setting “Circle“
Example for: n = 1 to 4� = 60°Nfw = forward directionNbw = backward direction
Dot-dash line: with arc compensationDashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in zone 1 only)
25 Impedance measurement with the circular characteristic
3 Operation(continued)
36 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
26 Setting impedance zones 2 to 4 and distance measurement
In addition to the settings described above, the zoneextension factors kze can be set separately for phase-to-ground (P-G) and phase-to-phase (P-P) loops for
impedance zone 1. The impedances modified by the zoneextension factor kze are calculated as follows:
Z k Zkze ze1 1, � �
The increase in reach by the zone extension factorkze HSR is controlled by
� protective signaling (PSIG: Z o n e e x t . );
� switch on to fault protection(S O T F : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n );
� an external signal(D I S T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
27 Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 37
3.3.4 Impedance-Time Characteristics
A maximum of four impedance zones and six timer stagesare available for impedance time grading. All impedancezones can be operated in a forward direction, backwarddirection, or non-directionally. The distance-independenttimer stage t5 can also operate forward-directionally,backward-directionally or non-directionally. Timer stage t6operates independently of distance and direction. All timerstages are started by "distance protection starting." Thestage times are corrected by the inherent delay or operatetime of starting (approximately 30 ms).
Zone 4 can be utilized as a special zone by means of theD I S T : Z o n e 4 setting. This makes it possible toimplement special characteristics for applications in cableor line networks.
When the D I S T : Z o n e 4 setting is "Normal", theimpedance zones, timer stages and directional settingsare assigned as follows:
Impedance zone 1 Direction N1 t1
Impedance zone 2 Direction N2 t2
Impedance zone 3 Direction N3 t3
Impedance zone 4 Direction N4 t4
Direction N5 t5
t6
The "Distance trip" decision is reached for zones 1 to 4 ifthe following criteria are satisfied simultaneously:
� A distance decision exists for the zone.
� The timer stage assigned to this impedance zone haselapsed.
� The measured direction agrees with the directionalsetting assigned to this impedance zone.
If several timer stages and directions are set to the samevalues, a distance trip occurs in the zone with the highestnumber.
The "Distance trip zone 5" decision is reached if thefollowing conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
� Timer stage t5 has elapsed.
� The measured direction agrees with the directionalsetting for N5.
After timer stage t6 has elapsed, the "Distance trip zone 6"decision is reached.
If protective signaling (PSIG) is used in the operatingmodes Signal comparison blocking scheme or Signalcomparison pilot wire, a distance trip occurs instanta-neously in zone 1 if the following conditions are satisfiedsimultaneously:
� There is a distance decision in zone 1.
� The measured direction agrees with the directionalsetting for N1.
3 Operation(continued)
38 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
28 Time and directional settings
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 39
29 Formation of distance decisions, with zone 4 operating normally
3 Operation(continued)
40 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
30 Examples of feasible impedance-time characteristics
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 41
Special Zones
� D I S T : Z o n e 4 "Section cable-line"This setting is selected for a mixed cable-line section ifautomatic reclosing will only be carried out if there is afault in the line area. In this case the cable must formthe front part of the transmission section and the linethe rear part.
Timer stage t1 and the N1 directional setting areassigned to impedance zones 1 and 4. The setting fortimer stage t4 and the N4 directional setting areinactive.
The "Distance trip Zone 1" or "Distance trip Zone 4"decision is reached if the following conditions aresatisfied:
� A distance decision for zone 1 or zone 4 exists.
� The measured direction agrees with the directionset for N1.
� Timer stage t1 has elapsed.
In order for the PD 521 to determine the section in whichthe fault is located, impedance zone 1 must be set for thetotal length of the transmission section and impedancezone 4 for the length of the cable. If a distance trip forzones 1 and 4 occurs after t1 has elapsed, then the signalDIST: Fault in cable run is generated.
31 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic
3 Operation(continued)
42 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
32 Formation of distance decisions, impedance zone 4: cable
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 43
� D I S T : Z o n e 4 "Section line-cable"This setting is selected in the case of a mixed line-cable section if automatic reclosing will only be carriedout if there is a fault in the line area. In this case theline must form the front part of the transmission sectionand the cable the rear part.
Timer stage t1 and directional setting N1 are assignedto impedance zones 1 and 4. The setting for timerstage t4 and directional setting N4 are inactive.
The "Distance trip zone 1" or "Distance trip zone 4"decision is reached if the following conditions aresatisfied:
� A distance decision for zone 1 or zone 4 exists.
� The measured direction agrees with the directionset for N1.
� Timer stage t1 has elapsed.
In order for the PD 521 to determine the section in whichthe fault is located, impedance zone 1 must be set for thetotal length of the transmission section and impedancezone 4 for the length of the line. If a distance trip onlyoccurs in zone 1 after t1 has elapsed, then the signalDIST: Fault in cable run is generated.
33 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic
3 Operation(continued)
44 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
34 Formation of distance decisions, impedance zone 4: line
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 45
3.4 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
The PD 521 monitors the phase currents and voltages forbalance during healthy system operation. If unbalance orthe lack of measuring voltage is detected, action is takento prevent the protection device from malfunctioning. Themonitoring signals issued in the event of a fault in themeasuring circuits are entered in the monitoring signalmemory. If this is not desired, entry of the monitoringsignals in the monitoring signal memory can be disabled.
Ground starting results in a warning signal if at least onephase-to-ground voltage is greater than 0.7 Vnom/�3.Thereby, warnings for lines disconnected at both ends areavoided in low-impedance-grounded systems wherecapacitively coupled neutral-displacement voltages inexcess of VNG> may occur.
35 Monitoring signals
3 Operation(continued)
46
Measuring circuit monitoring can be deactivated by theappropriate setting. In the event of a fault, measuringcircuit monitoring is blocked.
Monitoring the Current-Measuring Circuits
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function isenabled when the current exceeds the value 0125. � Inom inat least one phase. Once monitoring is enabled, theabsolute value of the negative-sequence component ofthe current system is determined in accordance with thedefinition of the Symmetrical Components.
� �I I a I a Ineg A2
B C� � � � �
13
a e j�
1200
a e j2 2400�
This value is divided by the maximum phase currentI P,max and compared to the set threshold operate value.If the set threshold operate value is exceeded, amonitoring signal is issued after 10.1 s. In addition, asetting can be selected that will determine whether a tripshall occur.
36 Monitoring the current-measuring circuits
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 47
Monitoring the Voltage-Measuring Circuits
The voltages used by distance protection as measuredvariables are monitored by the voltage-measuring circuitmonitoring function for plausibility. However, this does notreplace the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformerm.c.b., which is absolutely necessary in the case ofactivated undervoltage and underimpedance starting.
Monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits is based onthe following criteria:
� Monitoring the phase-to-phase voltages for voltagesthat fall below the default threshold of 0 4. �Vnom . Thismonitoring function is enabled when the phase currentis greater than 0 05. � Inom or for the “closed“ position ofthe circuit breaker provided that MON: Meas. volt .c ircuit is set to Vneg w. CB contact enabl.
� Monitoring the negative-sequence component ofphase-to-ground voltages in accordance with thedefinition of the symmetrical components. Monitoringis enabled when a phase-to-ground voltage exceedsthe default threshold of 0 7 3. /�Vnom . In addition tothis criterion, a minimum current having the defaultthreshold setting of I � �0 05. Inom or the closed positionof the circuit breaker can be used as enabling criteria.If there is an enable, the absolute value of thenegative-sequence component of the voltage system isdetermined in accordance with the definition ofsymmetrical components.
� �V 13
1V a 1V a 1Vneg A G 2 B G C G� � � � � �
a e j�
1200
a e j2 2400�
This value is compared with the default thresholdoperate value 0 2 3. /�Vnom . If the threshold operatevalue is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued after9.8 s.
If one of the monitoring functions described aboveoperates, then distance protection is blocked and thedevice switches to backup overcurrent time protection – ifthe appropriate setting was selected.
In addition, the monitoring signal “M O N : M e a s . v o l t .O K ” is issued if all phase-to-phase voltages exceed thedefault threshold of 0 65. �Vnom and negative-sequencemonitoring has not operated.
Monitoring Starting
If ground starting SG is present for more than 10 s withoutphase starting, the following monitoring signal is issued:M O N : M e a s u r i n g c i r c u i t s "Ground fault starting"(see Figure 35).
� ��
3 Operation(continued)
48
37 Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuit
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 49
3.5 Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection(BUOC or Backup DTOC)
If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distanceprotection is blocked, since accurate impedancemeasurement is not possible. Backup overcurrent timeprotection is automatically activated – if set accordingly.
Backup overcurrent time protection is enabled if there is afault in the voltage-measuring circuit. It monitors thephase currents for overcurrents exceeding the set valuesI>. If a phase current exceeds the set value, timer stage
tI> is started. After the set time period has elapsed, a tripsignal is issued.
If the "Low impedance-grounding" setting has beenselected, the ground current 1IN is also monitored by thesettable trigger IN>, in addition to the phase currents. Ifthe ground current exceeds the set value, timer stage tIN>is started. After the set time has elapsed, a trip signal isissued.
38 Backup overcurrent time protection
3 Operation(continued)
50
3.6 Switch on to Fault Protection
When the circuit breaker is closed manually it is possibleto switch on to an existing fault. This is especially critical ifthe line in the remote station is grounded since thedistance protection would not clear the fault until t2 hadelapsed. The fastest possible clearance is desirable inthis situation, however.
To guarantee rapid clearing with manual closing, themanual close signal must be issued not only to the circuitbreaker but also to the PD 521. The manual close signal
is converted to an internal pulse. The pulse time can beset. It is possible to specify whether the following shalloccur during operation of the timer stage:
� The appearance of general starting (see Section“Tripping Logic” for a definition of general starting) shallcause a trip (S O T F : T r i p a f t . m a n . c l o s e ).
or
� A zone extension of impedance zone 1 shall occur(SOTF: Zone extension).
39 Switch on to fault protection
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 51
3.7 Protective Signaling
The reach of the first impedance zone of the distanceprotection function is normally set for values less than100%. Protective signaling is used to extend protection to100% of the section. This is achieved by logical linking ofthe signals that are transmitted by the remote station’sprotection device.
In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, thefollowing requirements must be satisfied:
� It must be activated.
� There must be no external block.
� There must be no transmission fault.
� The function PSIG: Receive EXT must beconfigured to a binary signal input.
Protective signaling can be activated or deactivated fromthe local control panel.
40 Protective signaling enable
3 Operation(continued)
52 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Once protective signaling is ready, distance protectiontimer stage t1 is blocked. A trip enable in distanceprotection zone 1 is then issued after the protectivesignaling tripping time has elapsed.
41 Protective signaling tripping time
A communication malfunction or failure leads to aprotective signaling block. If protective signaling is carriedout by a signal transmission or communication device, thedevice’s fault signal can be connected. In the case ofprotective signaling via pilot wires or in the operating modereferred to as "reverse interlocking," an internal monitoringfunction detects any fault in the communication channel.
Protective signaling can be operated in seven differentmodes. The following operating modes require a signaltransmission device:
� Direct transfer trip underreaching
� Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)
� Zone extension
� Signal comparison release scheme
� Signal comparison blocking scheme
For operation in the mode referred to as "Signal compari-son pilot wire," pilot wires are required for signal trans-mission.
P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e "Direct transfer tripunderreaching"
When there is a “Distance trip zone 1" a signal is sent tothe remote station’s protection device. Upon receipt of thesignal by the remote station, the remote station’s circuitbreaker is tripped.
P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e "Permissiveunderreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)”
With a "Distance trip zone 1" a signal is sent to the remotestation’s protection device. Upon receipt of the signal bythe remote station, the remote station’s circuit breaker istransfer tripped as a function of starting.
42 Transmission fault
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 53
P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e "Zone extension"
With "Distance trip zone 1" a signal is sent to the remotestation’s protection device. Upon receipt of thetransmitted signal the measuring range of zone 1 in theremote station is increased by the zone extension factorkze HSR. If the fault lies within the extended zone, theremote station’s protection device also decides in favor of“Distance trip zone 1.”
43 Reaches with zone extension(broken line: measuring range increased by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e “Signal comparisonrelease scheme"
In the idle state the measuring range of zone 1 in bothprotection devices is extended by the zone extensionfactor kze HSR. The “Distance trip zone 1” of bothprotection devices is blocked.
If distance protection starting begins and the fault lies inthe forward direction, a signal is sent to the remote station.
In the event of a fault, both protection devices measure byusing the normal measuring range and the rangeextended by the zone extension factor kze HSR. A tripenable is issued if one of the following conditions issatisfied after the distance protection timer stage t1 haselapsed:
� The fault lies within the non-extended measuringrange.
� The fault lies within the extended measuring range anda transmitted signal is received by the remote station.
44 Zone reaches with the release scheme(broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
If both zone extension factors (kze P-G HSR andkze P-P HSR) are set at a value of "1.0," a trip enable isissued only if the second of the conditions given above issatisfied.
In the event of a change in direction the received signal isignored for 80 ms (“transient blocking”) so that falsetripping will not occur in double line protection.
P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e "Signal comparisonblocking scheme"
In the idle state the measuring range of zone 1 in bothprotection devices is extended by the zone extensionfactor kze HSR. The “Distance trip zone 1” of bothprotection devices is enabled.
If distance protection starting begins and the fault lies inthe backward direction, a signal is sent to the remotestation.
In the event of a fault, both protection devices measure byusing the normal measuring range and the rangeextended by the zone extension factor kze HSR. A“Distance trip zone 1” can be issued instantaneously (t0)with the normal reach. The “Distance trip zone 1” isblocked if the following conditions are satisfiedsimultaneously after distance protection timer stage t1 haselapsed:
� The fault lies within the extended measuring range.
� A transmitted signal is received by the remote station.
3 Operation(continued)
54 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
45 Zone reaches with the blocking scheme(broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
If both zone extension factors (kze P-G HSR andkze P-P HSR) are set at a value of "1.0," a trip is onlypossible after t1 has elapsed.
P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e "Signal comparisonpilot wire"
To form the communication link it is necessary to connecteither the break contact or the make contact of thetransmitting relay, depending on the transmitting relaymode selected (Transm. relay make contact or Transm.relay break contact), to the P S I G : R e c e i v e E X Tinput of the remote station by means of pilot wires.
In the idle state there is a received signal in bothprotection devices (DC loop closed), and the measuringrange of zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor
kze HSR. The “Distance trip zone 1” of both protectiondevices is enabled.
If distance protection starting begins and a fault lies in thebackward direction or if the overcurrent starting originatesfrom the distance protection starting, then a signal is sentto the remote station without delay.
In the event of a fault both protection devices measure byusing the normal measuring range and the measuringrange extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR. A“Distance trip zone 1” can be issued instantaneously (t0)with the normal reach. The “Distance trip zone 1” isblocked if the following conditions are satisfied simultane-ously after distance protection timer stage t1 has elapsed:
� The fault lies within the extended measuring range.
� A transmitted signal is received by the remote station.
If both zone extension factors (kze P-G HSR andkze P-P HSR) are set at a value of "1.0," a trip is onlypossible after t1 has elapsed.
The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. If, duringfault-free operation, that is, when there is no distanceprotection starting, no signal is received by the remotestation for a period longer than the set transmitted signalreset time plus 600 ms, then a P S I G : T e l e c o m .f a u l t y signal (see Figure 42) is issued, and protectivesignaling is blocked.
46 Protective signaling via pilot wires
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 55
P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e "Reverse interlocking"
In radial networks with infeed from a single end it ispossible under certain conditions for busbar protection tobe configured by sampling the starting of feeder protectiondevices. By means of appropriate interconnection, a sendsignal is then formed when a feeder protection devicestarts. The receipt of this signal by the PD 521 blocks the“Distance trip zone 1.” The blocking signal reset isdelayed by approximately 80 ms.
The pilot wires are monitored. If a received signal ispresent for more than 10 s without any distance protectionstarting, then the distance trip zone 1 block is canceled. Anew block cannot occur until the received signal hasdropped out.
47 Reverse interlocking
48 Zone extension by protective signaling
49 P S I G : R e c e i v e & g e n e r a l s t a r t i n g signal
3 Operation(continued)
56 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
50 Trip enable by protective signaling
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 57
51 PSIG send
3 Operation(continued)
58 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Echo Function
It is possible to select "without or with" echo on receive.This setting is only active in the following modes:
� PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer trip)
� Zone extension
� Signal comparison release scheme
� Signal comparison blocking scheme
If the "with" echo setting is selected, a signal is sent to theremote station if the received signal is present for morethan 50 ms and no “distance protection starting” is active.
The further transmission of a received signal as a sendsignal is then blocked for 20 s. This prevents apermanent signal from being transmitted.
Testing the Communication Channel
The communication link can be tested. For this purpose a500 ms send signal is issued through a binary signal inputor the integrated local control panel. The remote stationreceives this signal if the transmission section is OK.
In the mode referred to as "Direct transfer trip underreach"no test is possible, since a received signal will immediatelylead to a “Trip” in the remote station. Likewise, testing isnot possible with the "Reverse interlocking" setting.
52 Testing protective signaling and the echo function
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 59
3.8 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
Circuit breaker failure protection is activated by a generaltrip command from the PD 521 or – when a generalstarting state exists – through an appropriately configuredbinary signal input. After the settable time periodC B F : t C B F has elapsed, the fault must be cleared.Otherwise it can be assumed that the circuit breaker hasfailed. In this case the C B F : C B f a i l u r e signal isissued.
53 Circuit breaker failure protection
3.9 Ground Fault Direction Determination UsingSteady-State Values
Ground fault direction determination using steady-statevalues requires the neutral-point displacement voltage -formed from the three phase-to-ground voltages - and theground current as measured variables. A specialtransformer is provided in the PD 521 for the residualcurrent. The current transformer is designed specificallyfor this application so that it has a low phase-angle error.When there is a trip of the voltage transformer circuitbreaker, ground faults can be determined by steady-stateevaluation of the ground current. The user can specifywhether both ground current and displacement voltage willbe evaluated (steady-state power) or if only the groundcurrent will be evaluated (steady-state current). Theswitch from steady-state power evaluation to steady-statecurrent evaluation can also be carried out through a binarysignal input – given appropriate configuration.
When switching from steady-state power to steady-statecurrent evaluation or vice versa, the outputs of the non-active function are blocked.
If the system frequency is set to 60 Hz, ground faultdirection determination using steady-state values(GFDSS) is blocked.
54 Switching from steady-state power to steady-state current evaluation
3 Operation(continued)
60 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.9.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation
In order to detect the ground fault direction, ground faultdirection determination by steady-state power evaluation
requires the neutral-point displacement voltage 1VN-G andthe ground current 2IN.
55 Connection of ground fault direction determination by steady-state power evaluation
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 61
The settable frequency f0 is filtered out from thesequantities using Fourier analysis. Three periods are usedfor analysis if the setting selected for the timer stageG F D S S : t V N - G > is greater than 60 ms. This meansthat typical ripple control frequencies are suppressed inaddition to all integer-frequency harmonics. If the timerstage has been set at values less than 60 ms, only oneperiod is used for filtering purposes.
Measurement is enabled after timer stage t V N - G > haselapsed; this module is started by the trigger VN-G>.Depending on the operating mode selected – eithercos phi circuit or sin phi circuit – the sign of active power(G F D S S : O p e r a t i n g m o d e cos phi circuit ) orreactive power (G F D S S : O p e r a t i n g m o d e sin phicircuit ) is used. Connection of the measuring circuits istaken into account by the setting G F D S S : C o n n e c t .meas. c irc. With the standard (forward) connection(see Figure 55) a decision for "LS" is reached in the caseof a ground fault on the line side and "BS" in the case of aground fault on the busbar side.
56 Direction determination
3 Operation(continued)
62 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
G F D S S : O p e r a t i n g m o d e "cos phi circuit"
The direction decision is not enabled until the followingadditional conditions are satisfied: the active componentof the ground current 2IN exceeds the set value, and thephase displacement between ground current 2IN andneutral-point displacement current 1VN-G is smaller thanthe set sector angle. The sector angle makes it possibleto extend the “dead zone” to take into account theexpected phase-angle errors of the measured variables.With these settings the characteristic shown in Figure 57can be realized.
Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.
57 Characteristic of ground fault direction determination by steady-state power evaluation, operating mode cos �
GFDSS: Operating mode "sin phi circuit“
The direction decision is enabled if the reactivecomponent of current 2IN has also exceeded the setthreshold operate value. With these settings thecharacteristic shown in Fig 58 can be realized.
Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.
58 Characteristic of ground fault direction determination by steady-state power evaluation, operating mode sin �
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 63
59 Output of direction decisions
3 Operation(continued)
64 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Counting the Ground Faults
The number of ground faults and direction decisions iscounted. The counters can be reset at the address atwhich they are displayed by pressing the enter key (E)twice.
60 Counting the ground faults
3.9.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation
The settable frequency f0 is filtered out of the groundcurrent 2IN using Fourier analysis. Three periods areused for steady-state current evaluation. If the currentexceeds the set threshold value, then a ground fault signalis issued after the set operate delay has elapsed.
61 Evaluation of ground current 2IN GFD: Determination of ground fault direction by steady-state power evaluation GF: Ground fault detection by steady-state current evaluation
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 65
Counting the Ground Faults
The number of ground faults is counted. The counter canbe reset at the address at which it is displayed by pressingthe enter key (E) twice.
62 Counting the ground faults
Resetting the Counters
The counters can be reset both individually at the addressat which they are displayed and as a group.
63 General counter reset
3.9.3 Ground Fault Data Acquisition
The PD 521 stores the following measured ground faultdata:
� Ground fault duration
� Ground current IN
� With steady-state power evaluation:
� Active or reactive component of ground current
� Neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G
� With steady-state current evaluation:
� Filtered ground current
3 Operation(continued)
66 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Acquisition of Ground Fault Duration
� Steady-state power evaluation:Ground fault duration is defined as the time betweenoperation and dropout of the VN-G> trigger. However,there is only a time output after the end of a groundfault if the VN-G> trigger operated at least for the settime tVN-G>. After tVN-G> has elapsed, the display ofthe ground fault duration of the last ground fault isautomatically cleared and the symbol for “no valuemeasured” (....) is displayed. Once the VN-G> triggerhas dropped out, the newly measured value isdisplayed.
� Steady-state current evaluation:Ground fault duration is defined as the time betweenoperation and dropout of the IN> trigger. However,there is only a time output after the end of a groundfault if the IN> trigger operated at least for the durationof the set operate delay (G F D S S : O p e r a t ed e l a y I N ). After the operate delay has elapsed, thedisplay of the ground fault duration of the last groundfault is automatically cleared and the symbol for “novalue measured” (....) is displayed. Once the IN>trigger has dropped out, the newly measured value isdisplayed.
64 Measurement and storage of ground fault duration, steady-state power evaluation
65 Measurement and storage of ground fault duration, steady-state current evaluation
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 67
Acquisition of Ground Current
If the steady-state current evaluation function is active,then the unfiltered and filtered ground currents at the pointwhen the operate delay elapses are stored. If the steady-state power evaluation option of ground fault directiondetermination has been activated, then the ground currentflowing at the point when timer stage tVN-G> elapses isstored in memory. In addition, the active or reactivecomponent of the ground current at the time of thedirection decision output is also stored. All measured dataare output as per-unit quantities referred to the nominalcurrent Inom of the protection device.
Acquisition of Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage
The voltage 1VN-G is only acquired if the steady-statepower evaluation function of ground fault directiondetermination has been activated. The voltage that ispresent at the point when timer stage tVN-G> elapses isstored in memory.
Resetting the Measured Data
The measured values are reset together as a group. It ispossible to specify whether resetting shall be donetogether with the LED indicators. After resetting, thesymbol for “no value measured” (....) appears in the valuedisplay.
66 Storing the measured ground fault data
67 Resetting the measured ground fault data
3 Operation(continued)
68 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.10 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
The distance protection and backup overcurrent timeprotection starting signals are linked to form commonstarting signals. The number of general starting signals(GS) is counted.
68 Starting signals
The following signals of the protection device arecombined to form common trip signals and tripcommands:
� Distance trips for zones 1 to 6
� START: Trip VN-G>>
� MON: Trip by Ineg
� BUOC: Tripping signal
� SOTF: Trip after manual close
If the PD 521 is operating with protective signaling, then azone 1 trip can be issued by protective signaling in the"Direct transfer trip underreach" and "PUTT (Permissiveunderreaching transfer tripping)" operating modes. In allother protective signaling modes an enable must beissued by protective signaling. If protective signaling is notready, then the zone 1 distance trip is automaticallyenabled.
The trip signals are present only as long as the conditionsfor the signal are satisfied.
If a general starting condition exists, then a non-delayed,three-pole "starting trip" can occur by triggering anappropriately configured binary signal input.
A trip command can be issued not only by the protectionfunction but also through a control parameter (address03 40) or an appropriately configured binary signal input,in which case it is issued for 100 ms.
The trip commands can be blocked by a control parameter(address 21 12) or an appropriately configured binarysignal input. The trip signals are not affected by the block.If trips are blocked this is indicated by a steady light atyellow LED indicator H3 on the local control panel and byoutput relay K8 if configured accordingly.
The phase-selective trip commands, the general tripcommand and the final trip are counted. The counterscan be reset either individually or as a group.
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 69
69 Tripping logic
70 Counting the trip commands
3 Operation(continued)
70 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.11 Pass-Through Functions
The PD 521 distance protection device offers thepossibility of collecting external binary signals for thepurpose of indicating and recording them during a fault.The protection functions are not affected by these pass-through functions.
Input 1 for the freely configurable pass-through functionstriggers a settable timer stage. The timer stage operating
mode can be set. The user can choose between thefollowing modes:
� Operate-delayed
� Passing make contact
� Passing break contact
71 Pass-through functions
Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 71
3.12 Overcurrent Signal
The PD 521 offers the possibility of monitoring the phasecurrents for values that exceed a settable value. If the setvalue is exceeded in a phase, a signal will be issued afterthe set time period has elapsed.
72 Overcurrent signal
3 Operation(continued)
72 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.13 Operating Data Measurement
The PD 521 displays the following measured operatingdata:
� Phase currents for all three phases
� Ground current IN, which is either calculated from thethree phase currents or, if ground fault directiondetermination using steady state values is active, is thecurrent measured by the PD 521’s T4 transformer.
� Active or reactive current, determined by steady-statepower evalution (see Section “Ground Fault DirectionDetermination Using Steady-State Values”).
� Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages on theline side
� Neutral-point displacement voltage
� Filtered ground current IN, determined by steady-statecurrent evaluation (see Section “GF Evaluation(Ground Fault)“)
� Active and reactive power
� Active power factor
� Load angle � in all three phases
� Frequency
The measured values for current, voltage and power aredisplayed both as referred to the nominal quantities of thePD 521 and as primary quantities. In order for thesequantities to be displayed as primary values, the primarynominal current of the current transformer or the nominaltransformation ratio multiplied by the nominal devicecurrent and the primary nominal voltage of the voltagetransformer must be set in the PD 521.
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updatingis interrupted if a general starting state occurs.
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 73
73 Current and voltage operating data
3 Operation(continued)
74 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
The active and reactive power and the active power factorare determined when currents and voltages in all threephases are within the acceptable measuring range.
Current measuring range: 0.05 � Inom < I < 5 � Inom
Voltage measuring range: 0.1 � Vnom < V < 2 � Vnom
The load angles are only determined when the associatedphase current and the associated phase-to-ground voltage
are within the acceptable measuring ranges (see theranges given above).
If the values are outside the measuring ranges, a symbolfor “overrange” (-..-) is displayed. If values cannot beupdated or determined, a symbol for “value notdetermined” (....) appears.
74 Measured operating data: load angle, power and active power factor
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 75
3.14 Fault Recording
A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if atleast one of the following signals is present:
� S T A R T : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g (address 36 00)
� S T A R T : VN-G>> triggered, if the setting is yes for TriptVN-G>>
� M A I N : G e n e r a l t r i p s i g n a l (address 36 05)
� M A I N : G e n e r a l t r i p c o m m a n d(address 36 71)
� P S I G : R e c e i v e & g e n . s t a r t(address 37 29)
� F R E C : T r i g g e r
The faults are counted (address 04 20) and identified byserial number. In addition, the date of each fault is alsoassigned by the internal clock and stored. The internalclock also assigns the absolute time to a fault’s individualstart or end signals. The date and time assigned to a faultwhen the fault begins can be read out from the signalmemory on the local control panel or through the PC andILSA interfaces. The time information assigned to thesignals can be called up only through the PC or ILSAinterfaces.
The fault recordings are stored in non-volatile memory. 75 Fault counting and time tagging
3 Operation(continued)
76 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
The fault records can be erased in different ways. Thefollowing mechanisms are available:
� Automatic resetting of the fault signals indicated byLED indicators and of the measured fault datadisplayed at the appropriate addresses whenever anew fault occurs.
� Resetting of LED indicators and measured fault dataon the local control panel by pressing the reset key (R)on the panel.
� Area-specific resetting, such as only the signalmemory, for example, through addresses on the localcontrol panel or appropriately configured binary signalinputs.
� General reset.
In the first two cases listed above only the displays on thelocal control panel are cleared but not internal memoriessuch as the signal memory.
In the event of a cold restart, for example by control viaaddress 00 85, all stored signals and values will be lost.
76 Resetting
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 77
3.14.1 Fault Logging
Protection signals during a fault, including the signalsduring the settable pre-fault and post-fault times, arelogged in chronological order with reference to the specificfault. A total of five faults, each involving a maximum of64 start or end signals, can be stored in a non-volatile ringmemory -- the signal memory. After five faults have beenlogged the oldest fault log will be overwritten, unless faultshave been erased in the interim. If more than 64 start orend signals have occurred during a single fault, then“Signal mem. overflow” (address 35 01) will be entered asthe last signal. If time and date are changed during thepre-fault time, the signal FREC: Faulty t ime tag isgenerated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data arealso entered in the signal memory.
The fault logs can be read on the local control panel orthrough the PC or ILSA interfaces.
77 Signal memory
3.14.2 Measured Fault Data
When there is a fault in the network the PD 521determines the following measured fault data:
� Operating time (duration)
� Fault current
� Fault voltage
� Fault impedance
� Fault reactance in percent of line reactance and in �
� Fault angle
� Fault distance
� Ground fault current
� Ground fault angle
The operating time is defined as the time between thestarting and ending of the general starting state generatedin the PD 521.
78 Operating time
3 Operation(continued)
78 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
The fault must last for at least 60 ms so that the fault datacan be determined.
The fault data are determined using the measuredvariables Imeas and Vmeas selected by the distanceprotection function, if the fault is detected by distanceprotection. A phase current is selected as the fault currentin accordance with the selected measuring loop. In thecase of multi-phase starting this is the current of theleading phase in the cycle. If the measuring-circuit voltageVmeas < 200 mV, the set angle � is used to determine the
fault reactance. The set angle � is then also displayed asthe fault angle. The primary short-circuit reactance iscalculated from the per unit short-circuit reactance usingthe set primary nominal current and voltage transformerdata.
The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected for measurement by thedistance protection function. The geometric sum of thethree phase currents is displayed as the fault current. Theground fault angle is the phase displacement betweenground fault current and selected measuring voltage.
If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent timeprotection function, then only the fault current can bedetermined. The maximum phase current is displayed.
The F L O C : S t a r t d e t e r m i n a t i o n settingdetermines the actual time during a fault when the faultdata are determined and whether output of fault locationshall take place. The following settings are possible:
� F L O C : S t a r t d e t e r m i n a t i o nFault endDetermination at the end of the fault. The measuredF L O C : F a u l t l o c a t i o n value is output.
� F L O C : S t a r t d e t e r m i n a t i o nFault end / trip during t1)Determination at the end of the fault. Output of themeasured “F L O C : F a u l t l o c a t i o n ” value onlyoccurs if a trip occurred in distance protection zone 1.
� F L O C : S t a r t d e t e r m i n a t i o nTrip or triggerDetermination when a trip starts or a correspondinglyconfigured signal input is triggered. Output of themeasured F L O C : F a u l t l o c a t i o n value onlyoccurs if a trip occurred or if the binary signal input wastriggered. If neither a trip was issued nor the binarysignal input was triggered, the fault values are stored atthe end of the general starting state. There is then nooutput of fault location.
In order for the fault location to be determined in percentof line length and in km, the value of the line reactance –100% of which corresponds to the line section beingmonitored – and the value of the corresponding line lengthin km must be set in the PD 521.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unitquantities referred to Inom and Vnom. If the measured orcalculated values are outside the permissible measuringrange, the “overrange” indication (-..-) appears.
Permissible current measuring range: I � 100 � Inom
Permissible voltage measuring range: V � 2 � Vnom
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 79
79 Determination of fault data
3 Operation(continued)
80 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
In addition to the fault data, the following load data aredetermined upon dropout of distance protection starting:
� Load impedance
� Load angle
� Ground current
The same measuring loop used to determine faultimpedance is used to determine load impedance and loadangle. The load current and the voltage must exceed the
thresholds 0.1 � Inom and 0.1 � Vnom , respectively, in orderfor the load data to be determined. If the thresholds arenot reached or if distance protection starting does not lastas long as 60 ms, the symbol for “not measured” (....) isdisplayed.
After the reset key (R) on the local control panel ispressed, the symbol for “not measured” (....) is displayedat the respective addresses. However, the values are noterased and can continue to be read out through the PCand ILSA interfaces.
80 Determination of load data
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 81
If the maximum recording time of 4.35 s (or 3.33 s) isexceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault areoverwritten, but not the binary values. If more than fivefaults have occurred since the last reset, then all data forthe oldest fault are overwritten.
Fault recording can also be started manually from thelocal control panel or externally through a binary signalinput.
The analog data of the fault record can only be read outthrough the PC or ILSA interfaces. When the analog dataare sampled the neutral displacement voltage VN-G iscalculated from the phase-to-ground voltages and theground current IN is calculated from the phase currents.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warmrestart, the values of the last fault remain stored.
81 Fault recording
3.14.3 Fault Data Acquisition
The phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages arerecorded before, during and after a fault. The times forrecording before and after the fault can be set. Amaximum time period of 4.35 s / 3.33 s (including the pre-fault and post-fault recording times) is available forrecording if the nominal frequency is 50 Hz / 60 Hz..
3 Operation(continued)
82 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.15 Self-Monitoring and Fault Diagnosis
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the PD 521distance protection device ensure that internal faults aredetected and do not lead to malfunctions of the protectionsystem.
After the supply voltage has been turned on, various testsare carried out to verify full operability of the PD 521. Thelocal control panel display shows which test is currentlybeing run. If the PD 521 detects a fault in one of the tests,then startup is terminated. The display shows which testwas running when termination occurred. No controlactions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up thePD 521 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltageoff and then on again.
After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during operation. In the eventof a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal willbe issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – themonitoring signal memory – along with the assigned dateand time. A listing of all possible entries in this monitoringsignal memory is given in the address list (see AppendixC). The memory depth allows for a maximum of 30entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur withoutinterim memory clearance, the M O N : M o n i t o r s i g .m e m o r y signal “Overflow” (address 90 12, value 9) isentered as the last entry.
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signalmemory, this fact is signaled by the red LED indicator H1on the local control panel. Each new entry is indicated bya flashing light. The combined signal for all warnings mayalso be issued via an output relay. The output relayresponds as long as an internal fault is detected.
82 “Warning” signal
The number of entries stored in the monitoring signalmemory can be determined by reading the M O N : N o .o f m o n . s i g n a l s counter (address 04 19). Themonitoring signal memory can only be cleared manuallyby a control action. Entries in the monitoring signalmemory are not cleared automatically even if thecorresponding test has a negative outcome in a new testcycle. The contents of the monitoring signal memory canbe read from the local control panel or through the PC orILSA interface. The time information assigned to theindividual entries can be retrieved via the PC or ILSAinterface only.
83 Monitoring signal memory
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 83
The response of the PD 521 to monitoring signals takesone of the following forms depending on the signal.
� Signaling OnlyIf there is no malfunction associated with themonitoring signal, then only a signal is issued, andthere are no further consequences. This situationexists, for example, when internal data acquisitionmemories overflow.
� Selective BlockingIf a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does notaffect the protective function, then only the affectedarea is blocked. This would apply, for example, to thedetection of a fault on the ILSA bus interface module orin the area of the PC interface.
� Warm RestartIf the self-monitoring function detects a fault that mightbe eliminated by a system restart, for example a faultin the hardware, then a procedure called a warmrestart is automatically initiated. During this procedure,as with any startup, the computer system is reset to adefined state. A warm restart is characterized by thefact that no stored data and, in particular, no settingparameters are affected by the procedure. A warmrestart can also be triggered manually by controlaction. During a warm restart sequence the protectivefunction and communication through serial interfaceswill be blocked. If the same fault is detected after awarm restart has been triggered by the self-monitoringsystem, then the protective function remains blockedbut communication through the serial interfaces willusually be possible again.
� Cold RestartIf a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed in thechecksum test during self-monitoring, then a coldrestart is carried out. This is necessary because theprotection device cannot identify the corrupt parameterwithin the set. A cold restart has the result that allinternal memories are returned to a defined state.After a cold restart, this means that all settings of theprotection device have been discarded. The defaultsettings as found in the address list in the columnheaded “Default” apply instead (see Appendix C). Inorder to establish a safe initial state, the default valueshave been selected so that the protective function isblocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered thecold restart and the value indicating parameter loss(address 90 28) are entered in the monitoring signalmemory.
If the protective function is blocked, the condition issignaled with a steady light by the yellow LED indicator H3on the local control panel or, if desired, via an output relayconfigured accordingly.
84 “Blocked/faulty” signal
3.16 Serial Interfaces
The PD 521 has a PC interface as standard component.The ILSA interface is optional. Both interfaces allowsetting and readout.
When tests are run on the PD 521 it is advisable toactivate the test mode (address 03 12 or binary signalinput) so that the PC or the control system evaluates allincoming signals accordingly.
85 Setting the test mode
3 Operation(continued)
84 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
3.16.1 PC Interface
Communication with a PC is via the PC interface. In orderfor data transfer between the PD 521 and the PC tofunction, several settings must be made in the PD 521.
An FPC operating program is available as an accessoryfor PD 521 control.
86 PC interface settings
3 Operation(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 85
3.16.2 ILSA Interface
Communication between the PD 521 and the controlstation’s computer is via the ILSA interface. The interfaceprotocol complies with IEC 60870-5-103 ‘TransmissionProtocols - Companion Standard for the InformativeInterface of Protection Equipment, First edition, 1997-12’.
In order for data transfer to function properly, severalsettings must be made at the PD 521.
The ILSA interface can be blocked through a binary signalinput. Moreover, a signal or measured-data blocking canalso be imposed via a binary signal input.
87 ILSA interface settings
4
86 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
The PD 521 is mounted in an aluminium case.Connection is via threaded terminal ends. The case issuitable for either wall surface or flush panel mounting.The angle brackets and connector blocks are adjustablefor mounting in the chosen configuration.
Figures 88 and 89 show the case dimensions and fixturepositions. For flush mounting, a cover frame is available(see Installation and Connection).
Regardless of the design version, the PD 521 – as theother device types of the ILS-P system – is equipped witha standard local control panel. In order to protect thedevice according to the specified degree of protection, thelocal control panel is covered with a tough film. In additionto the essential control and indication elements, a paralleldisplay consisting of a total of 8 LED indicators is alsoincorporated into the local control panel. The meaning ofthe various displays is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The label strip is located in a pocket accessible from therear of the front panel. It can be replaced by user-specificlabels. A further label strip lists the addresses foroperation-related protection information and can also bereplaced by a strip with customized labeling. Theprocessor module with the local control module isattached to the reverse side of the removable front plateand connected to the I/O module via a ribbon cable.The I/O module incorporates the power supply, the inputtransformers and the power supply converters as well aseight output relays and two optical couplers for binarysignals.
The serial interface -X6 for parameter setting via a PC isset into the front panel.The optional ILSA interface -X7 and -X8 or -X9 (Orderextension number -302 and up) is located on theunderside of the case.
88 Dimensional drawing of the PD 521 in wall surface mounting configuration, -X7 and -X8 or -X9 are optional (dimensions in mm)
4 Design
4 Design(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 87
89 Dimensional drawing of the PD 521 in flush panel mounting configuration, -X7 and -X8 or -X9 are optional (dimensions in mm)
5 Installation and Connection
88 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
The PD 521 is packaged separately in its own carton andshipped inside outer packaging. Use special care whenopening the cartons and unpacking the equipment, and donot use force. In addition, make sure to remove from theinside carton the Supporting Documents supplied witheach individual device.
The design revision level of each module included with thedevice in its as-delivered condition can be determinedfrom the list of modules provided in the ‘Assembly List’supplied with the device (see ‘Components/Modules’).This list should be carefully saved.
After unpacking the equipment, inspect it visually forsound mechanical condition after transportation.
If the PD 521 is to be shipped, both inner and outerpackaging must be used. If the original packaging is nolonger available, make sure that packaging conforms toDIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height � 0.8 m.
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The PD 521 nominal data and design type can bedetermined by consulting the type identification label (seeFigure 90). The type label is located on the underside ofthe unit and on the lower side face in front of the terminalstrip. The type label is also affixed to the outside of the PD521 packaging.
PD 521 Schaltbild/diagram 89521.401 CEP 89521-0-XXXXXXX-302-401-602 XX.XX
Unom=100 V AC Inom= fnom=50/60Hz
UE,nom=24V..250VDC UH,nom=24 ... 60 V DC / 110 ... 250 V DC, 100 ... 230 V AC
F 6.XXXXXX.X ALSTOM-Nr.Vorschrift / specification DIN EN 60255-6 2kV (III) Made in Germany
90 PD 521 type identification label
The factory setting for the nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom(‘UH,nom ’) is underlined on the type identification label. Thenominal input voltage Vin,nom (‘UE,nom ’) is also shown onthe label.
From the Order No. (89521-0-...), the design version ofthe PD 521 can be derived using the key given inChapter 14 and in the Supporting Documents.
With the auxiliary voltage on, identification via the built-indisplay is also possible. After selecting the addressesgiven in Section ‘Device Identification’ in the Appendix Cto this manual, the corresponding information is displayed.
5.3 Location Requirements
The PD 521 has been designed to conform to thestandard EN 60255-6. Therefore when choosing theinstallation location it is important to make sure that itprovides the conditions specified in the Technical Data(see Chapter 2). Several important conditions are listedbelow.
Climatic Conditions
� Ambient temperature: - 5 to + 55°C
� Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
� Relative humidity:45 to 75 % (annual mean),up to 56 days at � 95% and 40°C.The relative humidity must not result in the formation ofeither condensed water or ice in the PD 521.
� Ambient air:The ambient air must not be significantly polluted bydust, smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Mechanical Conditions
� Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mmand 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
� Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5/1.5 mm and8 to 35 Hz, 10/5 m/s2
Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary DC Voltage for thePower Supply
� Operating range:0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12%VA,nom
Electromagnetic Conditions
Appropriate measures taken in substations mustcorrespond to the state of the art (see, for example, theVDEW ring binder entitled "Schutztechnik" [ProtectiveSystems], Section 8: "Recommendations for Measures toReduce Transient Overvoltage in Secondary Lines in HighVoltage Substations,” June 1992 edition).
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 89
5.4 Installation
The case and mounting dimensions are given inChapter 4. The PD 521 is delivered in the wall surfacemounting or the flush panel mounting configurationdepending on the order specifications.
When the PD 521 is being installed in a cabinet door, forexample, special sealing steps must be followed inaccordance with the IP 51 protection required for thecabinet.
Should the PD 521 mistakenly have been ordered forsurface instead of flush mounting, the connector blocksand angle brackets can be adjusted as shown inFigure 91.
� The two angle brackets D need to be removed afterundoing bolts C (three each on the upper and lowerface). Subsequently, bolts C are repositioned andtightened.
A B C DE
Surface-mounting
Front panel
Front panel
Flush-mounting91 Reconfiguration for flush panel mounting
� The two angle brackets D are now re-mounted usingbolts E with the longer leg of the angle bracketmounted flat on the face surface.
� The upper sections of the two connector blocks B canbe pulled away after opening bolts A and remountedafter turning by 180 degrees (see Figure 91).
� Please make sure
that all bolts A are loosened before attempting to pull offthe upper sections of the connector blocks!
For flush panel mounting, a panel cutout as per Figure 92is necessary.
The panel thickness must not exceed 3 mm.
92 Panel cutout for the PD 521 (dimensions in mm)
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
90 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
For wall surface mounting, the leads to the PD 521 areusually run along the front side of the mounting level. Ifthe wiring is to be behind, an opening can be providedbelow or above the terminal strip (see Figure 93).
93 Opening for the connecting leads. Shown for the lower terminal strip (dimensions in mm).
For flush mounting, the PD 521 must be fastened usingthe four bolts provided within the packing carton.
The cutout edges and the bolt heads can be concealedusing a cover frame with a snap-on fixture to the boltheads (see Figure 94).
94 Fixing the cover frame (dimensions in mm)
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 91
5.5 Protective and System Grounding
The device case must be reliably grounded for reasons ofprotective equipment grounding. This grounding step isalso absolutely essential for proper operation of the deviceand is thus equivalent to system grounding. Potentials thatneed to be grounded from an operational standpoint arealready properly connected to the equipment groundinside the unit.
Holes for the grounding connection are located in the twomounting brackets of the PD 521 and are labeledaccordingly.
A ground connection assembly kit is supplied with the unit.The ground connection must be assembled as shown inFigure 95.
Grounding must be low-inductance.
95 Ground connection assembly kit
5.6 Connection
5.6.1 Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Connect the PD 521 in accordance with the terminalconnection diagram specified on the type identificationlabel. The terminal connection diagram is included in theSupporting Documents supplied with the unit and is alsogiven in Appendix E of this manual.
Copper leads having a 2.5 mm2 cross-section aregenerally suitable as connecting leads between thecurrent transformers and the PD 521. Under certainconditions the connecting leads between the main currenttransformers and the PD 521 must be short and have alarger cross-section in order to handle the permissibleburden on the main current transformers. Copper leadshaving a 1.5 mm2 cross-section are sufficient for thebinary signal inputs, voltage inputs, the signaling andtriggering circuits, and for the power supply input.
As a general principle, all connections run into the systemmust have a defined potential. Pre-wired connections thatare not used must be grounded.
Connecting the Measuring Circuits ofDistance Protection
The current and voltage transformers must be connectedto the protection device in accordance with the standardschematic diagram shown in Figure 96. The default andfactory setting of the protection device is based on thiscurrent transformer connection scheme (“line-sidegrounding“). Connection of the current transformers inopposition (“busbar-side grounding“) can be taken intoaccount when making the settings (see Section 7).
The PD 521 is always equipped with four current inputs.
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
92 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
96 Standard connection diagram for the PD 521
Connecting Protective Signaling
Depending on the operating mode selected, either a signaltransmission device or pilot wires are required for signaltransmission. Transposed lines should be used for thepilot wires. Two or four lines are required. If only twolines are available, there must be an all-or-nothing relay ineach station for coupling received and transmitted signals.
The coils of the all-or-nothing relays must be designed forhalf the loop voltage. Figure 97 shows the connection withtwo lines and Figure 98 the connection with four lines.The protective signaling transmitting relay can be set toTransm. relay break contact or Transm. relay makecontact. In the first case the break contact must be wiredand in the second case the make contact. The figuresshow the connection for the setting Transm. relay breakcontact (K1 and K2 are shown in the de-energized state).
In addition, the PD 521 can also function together with theSV 35A protective signaling system or the V 34comparator relay if care is taken to ensure that at least apilot wire current of 10 mA is flowing.
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 93
97 Connecting protective signaling with two lines 98 Connecting protective signaling with four lines
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
94 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Connecting Steady-State Ground Fault DirectionDetermination
If the PD 521 is to function using ground fault directiondetermination by steady-state values, then the currenttransformer T4 must be connected to a window-typecurrent transformer or a current transformer in Holmgreenconfiguration. If the metal sheath of the cable is ledthrough the window-type transformer, then the overheadground wire must be led (insulated) through the core againbefore it is connected to ground. The cable sealing endmust be attached so that it is insulated from ground. Inthis way any currents flowing through the sheath will notaffect measurement.
For ground fault direction determination by steady-statevalues, the neutral-point displacement voltage - formedfrom the three phase-to-ground voltages - and the groundcurrent are required as measured variables. Figure 99shows the standard connection of ground fault directiondetermination by steady-state values. For this connection“forward/LS“ is displayed if a ground fault occurs on theline side. A different connection scheme for the currenttransformer can be allowed for by making the appropriatesetting (see Chapter 7).
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 95
99 Connecting steady-state ground fault direction determination devices to Holmgreen-configuration and window-type transformers
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
96 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Connecting the Auxiliary Voltage
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for thePD 521 power supply, make sure that the nominal value ofthe auxiliary device voltage agrees with the nominal valueof the auxiliary system voltage.
Polarity reversal protection is provided in the form of arectifier bridge. To preserve uniformity with otherprotection devices (L+ on terminal with smaller number),L+ should therefore be connected to terminal 13. ThePD 521 has an auxiliary voltage supply that can beswitched between ranges and is factory-set for the voltagerange of VA,nom = 110 to 250 V DC or 100 to 230 V AC.
Before changing the auxiliary voltagerange, turn off any connected auxiliaryvoltage. The components locatedbehind the front panel are energized!
The voltage range is switched by repositioning plug-injumpers on the I / O (input / output) module. Afterloosening four bolts on the front side of the front panel, thelocal control module (front panel and processor module)can be removed once the following plugs have beenremoved first:
� The tab connector on the case
� The tab connector on the lower circuit board(I/O module)
� The ribbon cable connecting the local control module(front panel and processor module) with the I/O module
� The ribbon cable connecting the local control modulewith the optional ILSA interface (to fiber optics or towire)
Where possible, disconnection of theribbon cable between the processormodule and the I/O module should beavoided. Should disconnection haveoccurred, however, then the deviceneeds to be re-initialized by way of acold restart.
In the upper portion of the I / O module, between outputrelay and current input transformers, are plug-in jumpers,which are plugged in as shown as follows, depending onthe desired auxiliary voltage range.
100 Plug-in jumpers positioned for an auxiliary voltage of 110 to 250 VDC or 100 to 230 V AC (view from component side)
101 Plug-in jumpers positioned for an auxiliary voltage of 24 to 60 VDC (view from component side)
!
!
5 Installation and Connection(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 97
5.6.2 Binary Control Inputs
Before connecting the control voltage Vin,nom for the binaryinputs in the PD 521, check to see whether the controlvoltage Vin,nom is within the operating range of 24 V DC to250 V DC. Polarity reversal protection is provided in theform of a rectifier bridge.
5.6.3 Tripping and Signaling Circuits
The freely configurable output relays and their connectionsare shown in the terminal connection diagram. The outputrelays are suitable both for tripping and signalingpurposes.
5.6.4 PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that PS 441 parameterscan be assigned from a personal computer (PC). Thespecial connection cable available as an accessory is theonly type of PC connection that may be used.
The PC interface is not intended for permanentconnection. Consequently the socket does nothave the extra insulation from circuitsconnected to the system that is required perVDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore whenconnecting the connection cable make surethat you do not touch the socket contacts.
After completing device control (parameter setting) via thePC, disconnect the PC connection cable on the interfacesocket to restore the specified degree of deviceprotection.
5.6.5 ILSA Interface
The ILSA interface is provided for stationary linking of theprotection device to a control system for substations or toa central substation unit. Connection is - dependeing onthe design of the ILSA interface - via a special connectorwith a fiber-optic conductor or via an RS 485 interface withtwisted copper wires.
The selection and assembly of an appropriately cut opticalfiber connecting cable requires special knowledge andexpertise and is therefore not covered by this operatingmanual.
Before connecting or removing the fiber-opticinterface, the supply voltage of the protectiondevice must be switched off.
Connection of the RS 485 interface to other devices is viaa 2-pole twisted conductor cable. For further guidelineson connecting the ILSA interface, please see the manualBus Technology in Integrated Protection and ControlSystems for Substations (ILS).
!
!
98
All data required for operation of the protection device areentered from the local control panel, and the dataimportant for system management are read out there aswell. The local control panel permits the following specificfunctions:
� Readout and modification of settings
� Readout of updated measured operating data andstate signals as well as stored monitoring signals
� Readout and resetting of counters
� Resetting of the parallel display (LEDs) and othercontrol functions for testing and startup
Control is also possible from the PC interface. In that casethe FPC control program is required, along with a specialconnection cable (see chapter 13 “Accessories and SpareParts”) and a suitable PC.
6.1 Display and Keyboard
The local control panel consists of two 4-digit, 7-segmentdisplays, six function keys and 12 LED indicators.
F
x y
E R
0 3 1 0
0 Value
Address
Enter KeyReset Key
"Up" Key
"Down" Key
102 View of the local control panel
The settings, signals and measured values are numerical-ly coded. This code is called the address and is displayedin the lower of the two 7-segment displays on the localcontrol panel. The value associated with the address isdisplayed in the upper 7-segment display.
� ValueThe value of the information or parameter just selectedis displayed.
� AddressThe address of the information or parameter justselected is displayed.
� “Up” and “Down” KeysAddresses can be selected, parameter valueschanged and event records read out by pressing the“up” and “down” keys.
Address Selection:
In the normal addressing mode, the two pairs of keysare decoupled from one another and affect theaddress display. The x coordinate of the addressbeing selected can be set using the left pair of keys,and the y coordinate can be set using the right pair ofkeys. The respective coordinate can be incrementedby pressing the “up” key and decremented by pressingthe “down” key.
Changing Parameter Values:
Parameter values can only be changed in the inputmode, which is signaled by the red LED indicator onthe enter key (E). In the input mode the two pairs of“up” and “down” keys are generally coupled and havethe same effect on the value display. The system runsthrough a value range, which is defined separa- telyfor each address together with the incrementation(see “Address List” in the appendix). The next highervalue is obtained by pressing the “up” key, and thenext lower value by pressing the “down” key.
Event Record Readout:
Readout of event records is possible after theappropriate memory has been accessed; this issignaled by the red LED indicator on the enter key (E).In this control mode the two pairs of “up” and “down”keys have different functions.
� EnterTo enter the input mode, press enter key (E). Press asecond time to leave the input mode. Activation of theinput mode is signaled by the red LED indicator on theenter key (E).
6 Control
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
6 Control(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 99
� ResetThe LED indicators can be reset by pressing the resetkey (R). The event records are not affected and remainin the event memories. Other functions of the reset keyinclude deactivation of the input mode (with no furtherconsequences) and keyboard locking.
The following diagrams of the individual control stepsindicate which specific display can be changed bypressing the “up” or “down” keys. A solid black dot in theupper left corner of the enter key indicates that the redLED indicator is lit up. The addresses used in theexamples below are not necessarily valid for the PD 521;they serve to illustrate the principles of local control.
6.2 Address Selection
Addresses are selected by pressing the two pairs of “up”and “down” keys. As long as the keys are being pressed,the value display remains dark. Approximately 1 secondafter the keys are released the value associated with theselected address will appear in the value display. Inprinciple, any address in the entire address range from00 00 to 99 99 can be selected. If, however, an address isselected that is not used in the PD 521, the value displaywill remain dark. The existence of entries in the signal ormonitoring signal memories is indicated during operation.This is indicated by the fact that while the “up” and “down”keys are being pressed the value display does not remaindark; instead, the following messages are displayed:
� "L..." if there is information in the signal memory
� "...E" if there is information in the monitoring signalmemory
If “L” and/or “E” still remain in the value display 1 secondafter the “up” and “down” keys have been released, thenthere is no information stored for that particular address.
Example:
Information inSignal Memory
Information inMonitoring Signal
Memory
Information inSignal and
Monitoring SignalMemories
F
x y
4 7 1 1
LF
x y
4 7 1 1
EF
x y
4 7 1 1
EL
6.3 Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any address and read theassociated value by pressing the “up” and “down” keys, itis not possible to switch directly to the input mode. Thissafeguard prevents unwanted changes in the protectivesetting. If the protective setting is to be changed, thechange-enabling function (address 03 10) must first beactivated. The change-enabling function is naturally theonly parameter that can be changed when the change-enabling function itself is not activated.
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Select the address for the change-enabling function by pressing the “up”and “down” keys.
F
x y
E R
0
03 10
1 Press the enter key (E). The redLED indicator on the enter key willlight up. The value can now bechanged by pressing the “up” or“down” keys.
EF
x y
E R
0
03 10
2 Set the value to “1” by pressingone of the two “up” keys.
F
x y
E R
03 10
1
3 Press the enter key (E). The redLED indicator on the enter key will goout. The change-enabling function isactive.
EF
x y
E R
03 10
1
6 Control(continued)
100
To prevent the change-enabling function from accidentallyremaining active after a protective setting has beenchanged, the enabling function is automatically canceled100 sec after the last key has been pressed (or once thereturn time set at address 03 14 has elapsed). Theaddress display immediately jumps to the settable returnaddress (set at address 03 13). The factory-set returnaddress is the address for the change-enabling function.The return time is restarted when any of the six controlkeys is pressed.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, notall parameters can be changed. For many settings it isalso necessary to deactivate the protective function(address 03 30). Such settings include, for example, theconfiguration parameters by means of which the deviceinterfaces can be adapted to the system. The followingentries in the “Change” column of the address list (seeAppendix C) indicate whether values can be changed ornot:
� "on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.
� "off": The value can be changed provided that the protective function has been disabled.
� "-": The value cannot be modified by control action.
When the change-enabling function is activated, theprotective function can be deactivated from address 03 30by setting the value to “0.” The protection device is factory-set so that the protective function is deactivated.
6.4 Changing Settings
If all the conditions given above for a value change aresatisfied, the desired setting can be entered.
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Example of a display. Thechange-enabling function is activatedand the protective function, ifapplicable, is deactivated.
F
x y
E R
03 10
1
1 Select the desired address(address 03 13, for example) bypressing the “up” or “down” keys.
F
x y
E R
03 10
03 13
2 Press the enter key (E). The redLED indicator on the enter key willlight up. The value can now bechanged by pressing the “up” or“down” keys.
EF
x y
E R
03 10
03 13
3 Set the new value (04 20, forexample) by pressing an “up” or“down” key. During this process thedevice continues to operate with theold value.
F
x y
E R
04 20
03 13
4 Press the enter key (E). The redLED indicator on the enter key will goout, and the device will now operatewith the new value. Another addresscan be selected for value changingby pressing the “up” and “down” keys.
EF
x y
E R
04 20
03 13
5 If the intended value change isrejected during the setting process(red LED indicator on enter key is litup), then press the reset key (R).The red LED indicator on the enterkey will go out, and the device willcontinue to operate unchanged withthe old value. Another address canbe selected for value changing bypressing the "up" or "down" keys.
RF
x y
E R
03 10
03 13
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
6 Control(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 101
6.5 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after they are accessed via theappropriate entry address. For this purpose it is notnecessary to activate the change-enabling function oreven to deactivate the protective function. Accidentalclearance of a memory via its entry address is notpossible.
6.5.1 Signal Memory Readout
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Example of a display. F
x y
E R
0 3 1 0
0
1 Select the address for entering thesignal memory (03 00) by pressingthe “up” or “down” keys.
F
x y
E R
0 3 0 0
- - - L
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
2 Press the enter key (E). The ad-dress display changes from 03 00 to04 20. A period is displayed aftereach digit in the address. Thisindicates that a special memorymode is now active. The faultnumber of the most recent fault (e.g.number 2) appears in the valuedisplay for address 04 20. In everyfault record the fault number is placedat the beginning of the related faultlog for identification purposes. Sincefor each new fault record the actualvalue of address 04 20 is increasedby the value of "1" in order to countfaults, the fault number of the mostrecent fault also corresponds to thenumber of recorded faults since thesignal memory was last reset. If,after entry into the signal memory,the address 04 20 and the value "0"are indicated, then no fault is storedin the signal memory.
EF
x y
E R
2
0.4. 2.0.
3 When the “up” key is pressedthere is no response.
F
x y
E R
2
0.4. 2.0.
4 When the “down” key for y ispressed repeatedly, the date andtime at fault inception appear.
� Year Address 03 98
� Day/Month Address 03 97
� Hour/Minute Address 03 96
� Seconds Address 03 94
� Milliseconds Address 03 93
F
x y
E R
0.3. 9. 8.
1 9 9 3
5 When the “down” key for y ispressed again, the oldest signal thatappeared during the pre-fault periodis displayed. Here the value “1” inthe value display means that thesignal has started. The end of thesignal is indicated by the value “0” inthe value display.
F
x y
E R
0.3. 8.6.
1
6 Control(continued)
102
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
6 If the “down” key for y continuesto be pressed, the fault signal log isread in chronological order, i.e., in thedirection of more recent signals.Signals that have appeared duringthe fault are marked with an extra “L”in the value display. After the signalsthat appeared during the post-faultperiod, the measured fault data aredisplayed. If a fault value was notmeasured, the display will show thesymbol “....” If the measured faultvalue is outside the acceptablerange, the symbol “-..-” will appear inthe display.
F
x y
E R
4.1. 0.1.
L 1
7 The next oldest signal isdisplayed by pressing the “up” key fory.
F
x y
E R
0.3. 8.6.
1
8 After the last entry in a fault loghas been reached by repeatedlypressing the “down” key for y, thenthe next time the “down” key for y ispressed the display switches to thebeginning of the next oldest fault.The beginning of this fault log isindicated again by the respective faultnumber, which appears first in the topdisplay (number 1 in this example).
F
x y
E R
0.4. 2.0.
1
9 When the “up” key for y ispressed the display does not jumpagain to the last entry for the nextmost recent fault log but rather backto address 04 20(= fault number) and thus back to thebeginning of the record for the nextmost recent fault.
F
x y
E R
0.4. 2.0.
2
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
10 If the display does not changewhen the “down” key for y is pressed,then the end of the record for theoldest stored fault has been reached.
F
x y
E R
4.1. 0.1.
0
11 When the x "down" key ispressed, the display jumps to thebeginning of the next older fault. Ifthe display already showed the oldestfault, nothing changes when the x“down” key is pressed.
F
x y
E R
0.4. 2.0.
1
12 When the x “up” key is pressedthe display jumps to the beginning ofthe fault.
F
x y
E R
0.4. 2.0.
2
13 The signal memory is exited bypressing the reset key at any locationin the signal memory. The periodsdisplayed after each digit disappear,and the address for entry into thesignal memory is displayed (03 00).Any address can then be selected bypressing the “up” or “down” keys.
RF
x y
E R
0 3 0 0
- - - L
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
6 Control(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 103
6.5.2 Monitoring Signal Memory Readout
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Example of a display. F
x y
E R
0
03 10
1 Select the address for entry intothe monitoring signal memory (03 01)by pressing the “up” or “down” keys.
F
x y
E R
03 01
E- --
2 Press the enter key (E). Themost recent monitoring signalappears in the address and valuedisplays (address 90 28 and thevalue 1, for example). A period isdisplayed after each digit in theaddress. This indicates that a specialmemory mode is now activated. If,after entry into the monitoring signalmemory, the address 00 00 and thevalue "0" are displayed, then nomonitoring signals are stored in themonitoring signal memory.
EF
x y
E R
1
9.0. 2.8.
3 When the two “down” keys arepressed there is no response.
F
x y
E R
1
9.0. 2.8.
4 The next oldest monitoring signalis displayed by pressing one of thetwo “up” keys. All monitoring signalscan be read in reverse chronologicalorder, i.e., in the direction of oldersignals, by repeatedly pressing oneof the two “up” keys.
5 The next most recent signal isdisplayed by pressing the “down”keys.
6 If the display no longer changeswhen the “up” keys are pressed, thenthe oldest stored monitoring signalhas been reached.
F
x y
E R
1
9.0. 2.8.
7 The monitoring signal memory isexited by pressing the reset key (R)at any location in the monitoringsignal memory. The periodsdisplayed after each digit in theaddress display disappear, and theaddress for entry into the monitoringsignal memory (03 01) is displayed.Any address can then be selected bypressing the “up” or “down” keys.
RF
x y
E R
03 01
E- --
6 Control(continued)
104
6.6 Resetting
All information memories – particularly the signal andmonitoring signal memories – and LED indicators can bereset manually. In addition, the LED indicators areautomatically cleared and reset at the start of a new faultso that they always display the last fault.
The user can also reset the LED indicators manually bypressing the reset key; this is always possible when thedevice is in the normal control mode. It always triggers anLED indicator test. The signal memory is not affected bythis process so that accidental erasing of the fault recordassociated with the reset signal pattern is reliablyprevented.
Because of the signal memory’s ring structure theinformation in this memory is automatically updated forfive consecutive events, so that in principle a manual resetwould not be necessary. However, if the signal memoryshould need to be cleared completely – after functiontests, for example – this can be done via thecorresponding reset address.
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Example of a display. F
x y
E R
0
03 10
1 Press the “up” or “down”keys to select the address forresetting the signal memory(03 06). The number of faultsrecorded since the signalmemory was last reset willappear in the value display (thenumber 2, for example).
F
x y
E R
2
03 06
2 Press the enter key (E). Thered LED indicator on the enterkey will light up. When the “up”and “down” keys are pressedthere is no response.
EF
x y
E R
2
03 06
3 Press the enter key (E). Thistriggers an LED indicator test.After it is completed the red LEDindicator on the entry key will goout, and all fault records will beerased. Any address can thenbe selected by pressing the “up”and “down” keys.
E F
x y
E R
03 06
0
4 If, after exiting the normalcontrol mode (red LED indicatoris lit up), the request to erasefault records is rejected, pressthe reset key (R). The red LEDindicator on the enter key will goout, and the fault recordscontinue to be stored in thedevice unchanged. Then anyaddress can be selected bypressing the “up” and “down”keys.
RF
x y
E R
2
03 06
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
6 Control(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 105
6.7 Password-Protected Control Operations
Certain actions from the local control panel, such as amanual trip command for testing purposes, have a specialaccess lock to prevent accidental output. This speciallock, called a password, consists of a specifically definedsequential combination of keys pressed within a certaintime period. The following example shows the password-protected output of a manual trip command:
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Example of a display. Thechange enabling command has beenissued (03 10=1).
F
x y
E R
03 10
1
1 Select the address for the manualtrip command (03 40) by pressing the“up” and “down” keys. A zero willappear in the value display.
F
x y
E R
03 40
0
2 After the enter key (E) is pressedthe red LED on the enter key will lightup. Although the change mode isactive, the value cannot be changedby pressing the “up” and “down” keys.A “change of value” is only possiblein this case by means of a specifiedsequential key combination (controlsteps 3 to 6) within a specific timeperiod. The following control steps,steps 3 to 6, must therefore becarried out within 4 seconds.
E F
x y
E R
03 40
0
3 Press the “up” key for x. F
x y
E R
03 40
0
4 Press the “down” key for y. F
x y
E R
03 40
0
5 Press the “up” key for y. F
x y
E R
03 40
0
6 Press the “down” key for x. Thevalue display will change from 0 to 1.
F
x y
E R
03 40
1
7 Press the enter key (E) to issuethe trip command. The value displaywill drop back to zero. If the resetkey (R) is pressed instead of theenter key, no trip command will beissued (value display returns to 0).
EF
x y
E R
03 40
0
6 Control(continued)
106
6.8 Keyboard Lock
After all settings have been made, the keyboard can belocked. This means that unauthorized or unintentionalchanges are no longer possible. To lock the keyboard thevalue “1” must be set at address 03 11 (password). Whenthe keyboard is locked the only key still functionally activeis the reset key. When the “up” or “down” keys arepressed there is no response from the device.
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Example of a display. Thekeyboard is unlocked. Note: for thisprocedure the value “1” must be setat address 03 11 (password).
F
x y
E R
0 3 1 0
0
1 Press the reset key (R) at anyaddress. All LEDs will light up.
R
2 Wait until the LEDs go out. Pressthe reset key (R) again. After thisnothing will happen when the x or y“up” and “down” keys are pressed.After the automatic return time haselapsed the address display will showthe return address, and theassociated value will appear in thevalue display. The return address inthis example is 03 10.
RF
x y
E R
0 3 1 0
0
If there is no response when the “up” and “down” keys orthe enter key are pressed (but the R key is active andcauses the LED indicators to be reset), then the keyboardis locked. The lock can be released by carrying out thefollowing operations. However, the four keys must bepressed within 4 seconds.
Control Step orDescription
Action Display
0 Example of the display when thekeyboard is locked. The reset key(R) is enabled for resetting the LEDindicators.
F
x y
E R
0
03 10
1 Press the “up” key for x. F
x y
E R
0
03 10
2 Press the “down” key for y. F
x y
E R
0
03 10
3 Press the “up” key for y. F
x y
E R
0
03 10
4 Press the “down” key for x.Now the “up” and “down” keys for xand y are enabled for selection of anew address.
F
x y
E R
0
03 10
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
7 Settings
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 107
The PD 521 distance protection device must be adjustedto the system and to the protected equipment by means ofappropriate settings. This section gives instructions fordetermining the proper settings.
The address list in the Appendix lists all parameters withtheir setting ranges and incrementation or selection tables.The Set Value Record Sheets in the Appendix make itpossible to keep a complete and well-organized record ofall settings.
The units are supplied with a factory-set configuration ofsettings that in most cases correspond to the “defaultsetting” given in the address list. If the factory settingsdiffer from the default settings, then this is indicated belowat the appropriate points.
The default settings given in the address list are activatedafter a cold restart. All settings must be re-entered after acold restart.
7.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record theordering information and the design version of theprotection device. They have no effect on the protectivefunction. These settings should only be changed if thedesign version of the protection device is modified.
7.1.1 Ordering Information
00 00 IDENT: Device typeThe type designation numbers are displayed,for example, “521” for PD 521. The displaycannot be altered.
00 48 IDENT: Device password 100 49 IDENT: Device password 2
This setting is used by the FPC software foridentification. For further details regardingthese settings see the description of the FPCoperating program.
00 50 IDENT: Auxiliary voltageSetting of the auxiliary voltage employed,for example, “220” for 220 V DC.
00 51 IDENT: Nominal voltageNominal voltage setting, for example, “100”for Vnom = 100 V.
00 52 IDENT: Nominal currentThe nominal current setting of the phasecurrent transformers, for example, “1.0” forInom = 1 A.
00 53 IDENT: Nominal frequencyThe nominal frequency setting of themeasuring circuits, for example, “50” for50 Hz.
00 54 IDENT: Nominal current INThe nominal current setting of the residualcurrent transformer, for example, “1.0” forInom = 1 A.
00 80 IDENT: Add. HW modulesThe hardware expansion setting for theprotection device. The PD 521 automaticallycarries out a warm restart in accordance withthis setting. The value can be increased butnot decreased. If a lower value is to be set,a cold restart must be carried out.This setting can only be made from theintegrated local control panel.
7 Settings(continued)
108 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
7.1.2 Design Version
The software version of the modules used in the PD 521can be read out at the addresses in this group.
02 00 IDENT: Data modelThe value displayed provides informationabout the data model that must be installed inthe PC so that the PD 521 can be operatedusing the FPC operating program. Thisdisplay cannot be altered.
02 20 IDENT: SW versionThe software version installed in the hardwareis displayed. This display cannot be changed.
7.2 Configuration Parameters
The interfaces are adapted to the system conditions bysetting the configuration parameters.
7.2.1 Control Interfaces
03 11 LOC: Access lock activeSince the local control panel is alwaysaccessible, measures have been taken toallow the local control panel to be locked. A“0” setting means “Locking not possible,” anda setting of “1” means “Locking possible”. Thekeyboard is then locked by pressing the R keytwice at any address.
03 12 PC/ILSA: Test mode USER Fig. 85When the test mode is activated signals ormeasured data for PC and ILSA are identifiedas “test mode”. One of the procedures thatdemand activation of the test mode is thetesting of the output relays via the integratedlocal control panel.
03 13 LOC: Autom. return addr.The address to which the display will returnafter the automatic return time has elapsed isset here. Thus the units will display well-defined information during operation.
03 14 LOC: Autom. return timeIf no key on the local control panel is pressedduring this set time, the following will occurautomatically:
� The display returns to the address definedunder 03 13
� The change-enabling function is canceled.
This ensures that the change-enablingfunction will not remain inadvertently activatedover a long period of time. The keyboard isnot automatically locked.
03 50 ILSA: Delta V Fig. 87A measured voltage value is transmitted viathe ILSA interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
03 51 ILSA: Delta I Fig. 87A measured current value is transmitted viathe ILSA interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
7 Settings(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 109
The measured frequency is transmitted viathe ILSA interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
03 53 ILSA: Delta t Fig. 87All measured data are transmitted againthrough the ILSA interface after this timeperiod has elapsed.
03 54 ILSA: Delta P Fig. 87The active power is transmitted through theILSA interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
03 55 PC: Delta V Fig. 86A measured voltage value is transmitted viathe PC interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
03 56 PC: Delta I Fig. 86A measured current value is transmitted viathe PC interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
03 57 PC: Delta f Fig. 86The measured frequency is transmitted viathe PC interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
03 58 PC: Delta t Fig. 86All measured data are transmitted againthrough the PC interface after this time periodhas elapsed.
03 59 PC: Delta P Fig. 86The active power is transmitted through thePC interface if it differs by the set deltaquantity from the last measured valuetransmitted.
03 68 PC/ILSA: Device addr. (CU) Fig. 8603 69 PC/ILSA: Device addr. (PU) Fig. 86
The device address is used for deviceidentification when communication is beingcarried out through the serial interfaces. Thedevice address of the communication unit(CU) and the device address of the processunit (PU) must have the identical setting.
03 70 ILSA: Command enable USER Fig. 87ILSA interface communication enablingfunction.
Note: If the ILSA interface has beenactivated from address 00 80 andthere is no ILSA connection or it isinactive, then the command enableshould be set at "0". For this setting,the commands are rejected and thetime synchronization signal isreceived and reset; cyclic measureddata are not transmitted.
03 71 ILSA: Baud rate Fig. 87The ILSA interface baud rate setting.
03 74 ILSA: Transm. cycl. data Fig. 87The measured data that are to betransmitted cyclically through the ILSAinterface are selected.
03 76 ILSA: Sig./meas.blck. USER Fig. 87When the signal and measured data block isactivated, no signals or measured data aretransmitted through the ILSA interface.Commands to the ILSA interface arerejected.
Note: When the ILSA interface is activatedvia address 00 80 and there is noILSA connection or it is not active,the signal and measured valueblocking should be set to“1”.
03 77 ILSA: Contin. general scan Fig. 87A continuous or background general scanmeans that the PD 521 transmits all settings,signals and monitoring signals through theILSA interface during slow periods whenthere is not much activity. This ensures thatthere will be data consistency with aconnected control system. The time to beset defines the minimum time differencebetween two telegrams.
03 80 PC: Command enabling Fig. 86PC interface communication enablingfunction.
03 81 PC: Baud rate Fig. 86Baud rate setting for the PC interface.
03 84 PC: Transm. cycl. data Fig. 86The measured data that are to betransmitted cyclically through the PCinterface are selected.
03 52 ILSA: Delta f Fig. 87
7 Settings(continued)
110 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
When the signal and measured valueblocking is activated, no signals or measureddata are transmitted through the ILSAinterface. Commands to the ILSA interfaceare rejected.
7.2.2 Binary Inputs
The PD 521 has two optical coupler inputs for processingbinary signals from the system. The connection schemefor the binary inputs is shown in the terminal connectiondiagrams. The address list gives information about theconfiguration options for all binary inputs (seeAppendix C).
When configuring binary inputs it is essential to ensurethat the same information cannot be processed by twobinary signal inputs. This means that a given function canonly be assigned to one binary signal input and not toboth.
A standard setting that differs from the “default setting”given in the address list has been factory-set. The factorysetting is given in the terminal connection diagrams in theSupporting Documents supplied with each device and alsoin Appendix E of this manual.
In order to ensure that the protection device will recognizethe input signals, the triggering signals must persist for atleast as long as the time periods given in the followingtable.
Configurable Functions
Value Description Min. trigger-ing time
Fig.
03 26 MAIN: Deactivate prot. EXT 20 ms 303 27 MAIN: Activate prot. EXT 20 ms 304 61 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT 20 ms 3504 64 PSIG: Telecom. faulty EXT 20 ms 4236 34 CBF: Input EXT 20 ms 5436 38 PSIG: Test telecom. EXT 20 ms 5236 45 MAIN: Trip cmd. block EXT 20 ms 6936 46 DIST: Zone extension EXT 20 ms 2336 47 SOTF: Manual close EXT 20 ms 3936 48 PSIG: Receive EXT 20 ms 5036 49 PSIG: Blocking EXT 20 ms 4036 51 MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT 20 ms 3736 88 FLOC: Trigger EXT 20 ms 7936 89 FREC: Trigger EXT 20 ms 8137 18 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT 20 ms 6937 70 PC/ILSA: Test mode EXT 20 ms 8537 72 ILSA: Command enable EXT 20 ms 8737 74 ILSA: Sig./meas.block EXT 20 ms 8738 16 MAIN: Starting trig. EXT 20 ms 6938 20 GFDSS: GF evaluation EXT 20 ms 5440 16 PASS. Input 1 EXT 20 ms 7140 17 PASS. Input 2 EXT 20 ms 7165 01 MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT 20 ms 76
03 86 PC: Sig./meas. val.block. Fig. 86
7 Settings(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 111
The operating mode of every binary signal input can beselected. It is possible to specify whether the presence orabsence of a voltage (mode active “high” or active “low,”respectively) shall be interpreted as the logic “1” signal.
54 01 INP: Fct. assignm. U 154 04 INP: Fct. assignm. U 2
Assign functions to binary signal inputs.
54 02 INP: Operating mode U 154 05 INP: Operating mode U 2
Specify operating mode of binary signalinputs.
7.2.3 Binary Outputs
The PD 521 has output relays for outputting binarysignals. The number and connection scheme of theavailable output relays are given in the terminalconnection diagrams. The address list gives informationabout the configuration options for all binary outputs (seeAppendix C).
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits themto be used either as command relays or as signal relays.One signal can also be assigned to several output relayssimultaneously for the purpose of contact multiplication.
A standard setting that differs from the “default setting”given in the address list has been factory-set for some ofthe freely configurable output relays. The factory setting isgiven in the terminal connection in the SupportingDocuments supplied with each device and also inAppendix E of this manual.
51 01 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 151 03 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 251 05 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 351 07 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 451 09 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 551 11 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 651 13 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 751 15 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 8
Assign functions to output relays.
7.2.4 LED Indicators
The PD 521 has a total of 12 LED indicators for paralleldisplay of binary signals. The address list givesinformation about the configuration options for all LEDindicators (see Appendix C).
A standard setting that differs from the “default setting”given in the address list has been factory-set for some ofthe freely configurable LED indicators. The factory settingis given in the terminal connection diagrams of theSupporting Documents supplied with the device and inAppendix E of this manual.
57 01 LED: Fct. assignm. H 157 03 LED: Fct. assignm. H 257 05 LED: Fct. assignm. H 357 07 LED: Fct. assignm. H 457 09 LED: Fct. assignm. H 557 11 LED: Fct. assignm. H 657 13 LED: Fct. assignm. H 757 15 LED: Fct. assignm. H 857 17 LED: Fct. assignm. H 957 19 LED: Fct. assignm. H 1057 21 LED: Fct. assignm. H 1157 23 LED: Fct. assignm. H 12
Assign functions to LED indicators. LEDindicators H 1, H 2 and H 3 havepermanently assigned functions.
7 Settings(continued)
112 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
7.3 Function Parameters
7.3.1 Global
The PD 521 can be adjusted to the network and systemconditions by means of a few global settings.
03 30 MAIN: Protection active Fig. 3Deactivation or activation of the protectivefunction. The parameters indicated by “off” inthe address list can only be changed whenprotection is deactivated. The devices areshipped with the protection functionsdisabled.
10 03 MAIN: Nominal current Fig. 2Distance protection includes this setting whencalculating all settings and measured datain �. Therefore for proper operation ofdistance protection, the PD 521’s nominalcurrent, 1 A or 5 A, must be entered.
10 04 MAIN: Connect. meas. circ. Fig. 2Connection of the measuring voltage circuitsdetermines directional measurement of thedistance protection function. If the connectionis made as described in Chapter 5, then the“Forward” setting (1) should be selected if thePD 521’s “forward” decision will be in thedirection of the outgoing feeder. If theconnection direction is reversed or, given theconnection direction according to Chapter 5, ifthe decision for “forward” is to be in thebusbar direction, then the setting must be “2.”
10 30 MAIN: System frequencyThe nominal frequency of the network mustbe set. If the chosen setting is “60“ = 60 Hz,the ground fault direction determination bysteady-state values cannot be enabled.
10 40 MAIN: Transfer for 1p Fig. 13For single-phase overcurrent starting withoutground starting either ground starting oranother phase starting needs to be transfer-tripped. The user may choose to always tripthe ground starting function or, depending oncurrent magnitude, ground or phase starting.See the section on “Starting Logic” in Chapter3 for more information.
10 41 MAIN: Phase priority 2pN Fig. 14The selection of measured variables in theevent of two-phase grounded faults is afunction of the set phase priority.
10 48 MAIN: Neutral-point treat. Fig. 4The neutral-point treatment for the networkmust be set.
10 49 MAIN: Rotary field Fig. 16The rotary field direction, either clockwise orcounterclockwise, must be set.
21 12 MAIN: Trip cmd. block USER Fig. 69The trip command is blocked from the localcontrol panel. On delivery, the trip commandis not blocked.
7.3.2 Main Functions
10 36 START: tI>> Fig. 4Setting for the operate delay of overcurrentstarting.
10 50 START: Xfw Fig. 12Setting for the reactance limit ofunderimpedance starting.
10 51 START: Rfw P-G Fig. 12Setting for the resistance limit ofunderimpedance starting for phase-to-groundloops.
10 52 START: Rfw P-P Fig. 12Setting for the resistance limit ofunderimpedance starting for phase-to-phaseloops.
10 53 START: Zbw/Zfw Fig. 12Setting for the limit of underimpedancestarting in the backward direction.
10 54 START: I>> Fig. 4Setting for the threshold operate value forovercurrent starting.
10 55 START: IN> Fig. 5Setting for the threshold operate value of theground current stage for ground starting.
10 56 START: VN-G> Fig. 5Setting for the threshold operate value of thevoltage trigger VN-G> for ground starting. Ifthe nominal voltage of the station transformerdiffers from 100 V, the setting must always bereferred to the nominal voltage of the PD 521(see type identification label) and not to thenominal voltage of the station transformer.
7 Settings(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 113
In systems with isolated/resonant neutral-point grounding, the operate delay tIN>should be set so that the ground currents INthat flow as the result of phase-to-groundcapacitance reversals do not lead toerroneous ground starting.
Note: Starting does not occur in thecase of ungrounded single-phasefaults until tIN> has elapsed.tIN>
should never be set less than 20 msso that starting
transfer will not anticipate starting in another phase.
10 60 START: Trip tVN-G>> Fig. 7Using this setting it is possible tospecify whether, for operation of theS T A R T : V N - G > > trigger, a trip commandshall be issued after theS T A R T : t V N - G > > timer stagehas elapsed.
Note: A trip command is issued only ifMAIN: Neutral-point t reat.is set to Low-impedance grounding.
10 61 START: tVN-G>> Fig. 5The operate delay time setting for theS T A R T : V N - G > > trigger.
10 62 START: VN-G>> Fig. 5Setting for the threshold operate value of theVN-G>> trigger for ground starting. If thenominal voltage of the station transformerdiffers from 100 V, the setting must always bereferred to the nominal voltage of thePD 521 (see type identification label) and notto the nominal voltage of the stationtransformer.
10 63 START: ���� Fig. 12Angle setting for load masking duringunderimpedance starting.
10 67 START: Operating mode Fig. 9Operating mode setting for underimpedanceand undervoltage starting. The followingsettings are possible:
� Without V< starting.Undervoltage starting is deactivated.
� With V< starting, P-G.Undervoltage starting evaluate decisionsof phase-to-ground loops only.
� With V< start. P-G, P-P.Undervoltage starting measurementsystems are switched by ground startingfrom phase-to-phase to phase-to-groundsystems.
10 68 START: I> (Imin) Fig. 8Base current setting above which under-voltage and underimpedance starting isenabled.
10 69 START: V< Fig. 9Threshold operate value setting forundervoltage starting.
Note:The undervoltage fault detection logic can bedisabled with the setting “0“. This ispermitted only if a starting by the overcurrentfault detection logic is assured for near faults(Vsh < 2% Vnom).
25 93 START: Z evaluation Fig. 12This setting determines whether the PD 521will carry out the impedance calculation ofthe phase-to-ground loops using the phasecurrent corrected by the set ground factor orusing twice the phase current.
10 57 START: tIN> Fig. 5
7 Settings(continued)
114 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
12 00 DIST: Zone 4 Fig. 28Zone 4 can be used as a special zone. Thissetting determines the way in which zone 4will be utilized. The following settings arepossible:
� NormalA directional and timer stage is assignedto each impedance zone.
� Section cable - lineWith this setting the impedance setting ofimpedance zone 4 is assigned to timerstage t1 and directional setting N1.The settings t4 and N4 are inactive. If atrip occurs in impedance zones 1 and 4after t1 has elapsed, an external ARC canbe blocked.
� Section line - cableWith this setting the impedance setting ofimpedance zone 4 is assigned to timerstage t1 and directional setting N1. Thesettings t4 and N4 are inactive. If atripoccurs in impedance zone 1 only, aftert1 has elapsed, an external ARC can beblocked.
12 01 DIST: X1 (polygon) Fig. 23
12 02 DIST: X2 (polygon) Fig. 22
12 03 DIST: X3 (polygon) Fig. 22
12 04 DIST: X4 (polygon) Fig. 22Reactance limit setting for impedance zones1 to 4 in secondary values.
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a specialzone (see D I S T : Z o n e 4setting). This must be taken into account when setting X4.
12 05 DIST: R1 P-G (polygon) Fig. 23
12 07 DIST: R2 P-G (polygon) Fig. 22
12 09 DIST: R3 P-G (polygon) Fig. 22
12 11 DIST: R4 P-G (polygon) Fig. 22Resistance limit setting for impedance zones1 to 4 in secondary values for the phase-to-ground loops.
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a specialzone (see D I S T : Z o n e 4 setting). This must be taken intoaccount when setting R4.
12 06 DIST: R1 P-P (polygon) Fig. 2312 08 DIST: R2 P-P (polygon) Fig. 22
12 10 DIST: R3 P-P (polygon) Fig. 22
12 12 DIST: R4 P-P (polygon) Fig. 22Resistance limit setting for impedance zones1 to 4 in secondary values for the phase-to-phase loops.
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a specialzone (see D I S T : Z o n e 4setting). This must be taken intoaccount when setting R4.
12 13 DIST: ���� (polygon) Fig. 22The inclination of the trip polygon in the Rdirection for the polygonal impedancecharacteristic is determined using this setting.
12 23 DIST: Direction N1 Fig. 2812 24 DIST: Direction N2 Fig. 2812 25 DIST: Direction N3 Fig. 2812 26 DIST: Direction N4 Fig. 2812 27 DIST: Direction N5 Fig. 28
The directional setting specifies in whatdirection the respective impedance stagemeasures – referred to the basic measuringdirection determined by the connectiondirection of the measuring circuits and setting10 04. The following settings are possible:
� Forward directional� Backward directional� Non-directional
12 28 DIST: t1 Fig. 28
12 29 DIST: t2 Fig. 28
12 30 DIST: t3 Fig. 28
12 31 DIST: t4 Fig. 28
12 32 DIST: t5 Fig. 28
12 33 DIST: t6 Fig. 28Settings for the impedance zone stage times
and the backup times.
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a specialzone (see D I S T : Z o n e 4setting). This must be taken intoaccount when setting t4.If the PD 521 is operating withprotective signaling or auto-reclosing control, timer stage t1 isdeactivated. It is replaced by thestarting time for protectivesignaling.
7 Settings(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 115
12 34 DIST: kze P-G HSR Fig. 23
12 35 DIST: kze P-P HSR Fig. 23The zone extension factors kze HSR can beset separately for phase-to-ground and forphase-to-phase loops. When the polygoncharacteristic has been selected, the zoneextension factor setting changes thereactance and resistance limits forimpedance zone 1. The following applies tothe measurement:
X1,ze HSR = (kze HSR) � X1R1,ze HSR = (kze HSR) � R1
X1,ze HSR: reactance changed by thezone extension factor.
R1,ze HSR: resistance changed by thezone extension factor.
When the circular characteristic has beenselected, the The following applies to themeasurement:
Z1,ze HSR = (kze HSR) � Z1
Z1,ze HSR: impedance changed by thezone extension factor.
Zone extension is controlled by the followingfunctions:
� Protective signaling
� Switch on to fault protection
� An appropriately configured binary signalinput.
12 36 DIST: kG angle Fig. 2Angle setting for the complex groundfactor kG.
kZ Z3 ZG0 pos
pos�
�
�
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedanceZpos : positive-sequence impedance
k angle arc tanX XR R
arc tanXRG
0 pos
0 pos
pos
pos�
�
�
�
R0: zero-sequence impedance resistanceRpos : positive-sequ. impedance resistanceX0 : zero-sequence impedance reactanceXpos : positive-sequ. impedance reactance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly,then the next smaller value should be set.
12 37 DIST: kG abs. value Fig. 2Setting the absolute value for the complexground factor kG.
kZ Z3 Z0 pos
posG �
�
�
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedanceZpos : positive-sequence impedance
� � � �k
X X R R
R XG
pos pos
pos pos
�
� � �
� �
02
02
2 23
R0: zero-sequ. impedance resistanceRpos : positive-sequ. impedance resistanceX0 : zero-sequ. impedance reactanceXpos : positive-sequ. impedance reactance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly,the next smaller value should be set.
7 Settings(continued)
116 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
12 38 DIST: Arc. comp. (circle) Fig. 25
Enabling / disabling the arc compensation.
Note: This setting is active for thesetting DIST: Character ist ic“Circle“ only.
12 40 DIST: Characteristic Fig. 18Selection of the characteristic for the distancemeasurement.
12 41 DIST: ���� (circle) Fig. 26
This setting is of significance with the circularcharacteristic only when the setting“With arc compensation“ is active. In thiscase, the setting of � determines the point atwhich arc compensation becomes active.
12 42 DIST: Z1 (circle) Fig. 27
12 43 DIST: Z2 (circle) Fig. 26
12 44 DIST: Z3 (circle) Fig. 26
12 45 DIST: Z4 (circle) Fig. 26Impedance limit setting for impedance zones1 to 4 in secondary values.
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a specialzone (see D I S T : Z o n e 4setting). This must be taken intoaccount when setting Z4.
7.3.3 Supplementary Functions
Operating Value Measurement
10 01 OMEAS: Inom,prim. C.T. Fig. 73Setting for the primary nominal current of themain current transformer.This setting rule only applies if the secondarynominal current of the main currenttransformer and the nominal current of theprotection device are identical. Generallyspeaking, the setting must be in accordancewith the expression Tnom,CT � Inom,relay(where T is the transmission ratio).
10 02 OMEAS: Vnom,prim. V.T. Fig. 73Setting for the primary nominal voltage of themain voltage transformer.This setting rule only applies if the secondarynominal voltage of the main voltagetransformer and the nominal voltage of theprotection device are identical. Generallyspeaking, the setting must be in accordancewith the expression Tnom,VT � Vnom,relay(where T is the transmission ratio).
Pass-Through Functions
17 21 PASS: tEM1 Fig. 71Timer stage setting.
17 30 PASS: Op. mode tEM1 Fig. 71Selection of timer stage operating mode.
7 Settings(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 117
Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-StateValues
16 60 GFDSS: Enabled Fig. 54Deactivation or activation of steady-stateground fault direction determination. TheGFDSS function may be enabled only if thenominal frequency is set to 50 Hz.
16 61 GFDSS: tVN-G> Fig. 56Setting for the operate delay VN-G>.
16 62 GFDSS: VN-G> Fig. 56Setting for the neutral-point displacementvoltage threshold value.
16 63 GFDSS: Operating mode Fig. 56Setting for the operating mode of ground faultdirection determination using steady-statevalues. The following settings are possible:� “cos phi circuit” for networks having
ground fault compensation,� “sin phi circuit” for networks having an
isolated neutral.
16 64 GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac> LS Fig. 59Setting for the threshold value of the active orreactive component of the ground current, thevalue that must be exceeded in order for theLS (line side) direction decision to beenabled.
16 65 GFDSS: Sector angle LS Fig. 59Sector angle setting for measurement in thedirection of the line side.
Note: This setting is only active if theoperating mode “cos phi circuit”has been selected.
16 66 GFDSS: Operate delay LS Fig. 59Operate delay setting for the directiondecision in the forward direction.
16 67 GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac> BS Fig. 59Setting for the threshold value of the active orreactive component of the ground current, thevalue that must be exceeded in order for theBS (busbar side) direction decision to beenabled.
16 68 GFDSS: Sector angle BS Fig. 59Sector angle setting for measurement in thedirection of the busbar side.
Note: This setting is only active if theoperating mode “cos phi circuit”has been selected.
16 69 GFDSS: Operate delay BS Fig. 59Operate delay setting for the directiondecision in the backward direction.
16 70 GFDSS: Connect. meas.circ. Fig. 56Connection of the measuring circuits deter-mines the directional measurement functionof steady-state ground fault direction deter-mination. If the connection is as shown inChapter 5, then the setting must be Forward(value “1“) if the PD 521’s “forward” decisionis to be in the direction of the outgoingfeeder. If the connection direction isreversed or – given the connection directionaccording to Chapter 5 – if the “forward”decision will be in the busbar direction, thenthe setting must be “2.”
16 71 GFDSS: Common reset Fig. 67This setting determines whether themeasured data of steady-state ground faultdirection determination and the LEDindicators shall be reset together.
16 72 GFDSS: Release delay LS Fig. 59Release delay setting for the directiondecision in the forward direction.
16 73 GFDSS: Release delay BS Fig. 59Release delay setting for the directiondecision in the backward direction.
16 90 GFDSS: Select GFD/GF Fig. 54This setting determines whether a steady-state power evaluation or a steady-statecurrent evaluation shall be carried out.
16 91 GFDSS: f0 (GFD) Fig. 56Frequency setting for the measuredvariables that will be evaluated by steady-state power evaluation.
16 92 GFDSS: f0 (GF) Fig. 61Frequency setting for the measuredvariables that will be evaluated by steady-state current evaluation.
16 93 GFDSS: IN> Fig. 61Operate value setting for steady-statecurrent evaluation.
16 94 GFDSS: Operate delay IN Fig. 61Operate delay setting for steady-state currentevaluation.
16 95 GFDSS: Release delay IN Fig. 61Release delay setting for steady-statecurrent evaluation.
7 Settings(continued)
118 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
This setting defines in km the section that thefault locator considers to be 100 % whencalculating the fault distance.
10 11 FLOC: Start determination Fig. 79This setting determines at what point during afault the fault data shall be measured.
10 12 FLOC: Line reactance Fig. 79This setting defines the reactance (X) that thefault locator considers to be 100% whencalculating the fault distance.
Overcurrent (I>) Signal
14 04 I>SIG: Threshold value Fig. 72Threshold setting for the overcurrent signal.
14 08 I>SIG: t Fig. 72Operate delay setting.
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
11 67 CBF: tCBF Fig. 53Setting for the operate delay time after whicha “circuit breaker failure” signal shall beissued.
Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection (Backup DTOC)
14 00 BUOC: Operating mode Fig. 38The operating mode of backup overcurrent-time protection is selected. The followingoperating modes are possible:Without backup DTOCWith backup DTOC
17 00 BUOC: I> Fig. 38Threshold operate value for phase currents inbackup overcurrent-time protection.
17 03 BUOC: IN> Fig. 38Threshold operate value for ground faultcurrent in backup overcurrent-time protection.
Note: A trip command is issued only ifMAIN: Neutral-point treat.is set to Low-impedancegrounding.
17 04 BUOC: tI> Fig. 38Operate delay for backup overcurrent-timeprotection.
17 08 BUOC: tIN> Fig. 38Operate delay for backup overcurrent-timeprotection.
Fault Localization
10 05 FLOC: Line length Fig. 79
7 Settings(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 119
Fault Recording
03 78 FREC: Pre-fault time Fig. 81Setting for the period during which data arerecorded before the start of a fault.
03 79 FREC: Post-fault time Fig. 81Setting for the period during which data arerecorded after the end of a fault.
03 95 FREC: Time-switching Fig. 75Specification of standard time or daylightsaving time.This setting is necessary so that the timesassigned to signals and fault data, which canbe read out from the PC or ILSA interfaces,will not be incorrectly interpreted.
03 96 FREC: Time of day Fig. 75Time of day setting for time tagging ofsignals.
03 97 FREC: Date Fig. 75Day and month setting for dating faults andmonitoring signals.
03 98 FREC: Year Fig. 75Year setting for dating faults and monitoringsignals.
Protective Signaling
15 00 PSIG: Operating mode Fig. 50The protective signaling operating modesetting. The following settings are possible:
Direct transfer trip underreachingPUTT (Permissive underreachingtransfer tripping)Zone extensionSignal comparison, releasing schemeSignal comparison, blocking schemeSignal comparison, pilot wireReverse interlocking
15 02 PSIG: Reset time send Fig. 51This setting determines the duration of thesend signal.
15 03 PSIG: Echo on receive Fig. 52This setting determines whether protectivesignaling shall operate with or without anecho.
15 04 PSIG: Enabled USER Fig. 40Deactivation or activation of protectivesignaling.
15 11 PSIG: Tripping time Fig. 41The tripping time replaces distanceprotection timer stage t1 when protectivesignaling is ready.
15 12 PSIG: DC loop op. mode Fig. 51This setting determines whether thetransmitting relay shall be operated in anenergize-on-signal or in a normally-energizedarrangement (‘open-circuit’ or ‘closed-circuit’operation).
Note: This setting is only possible in theoperating mode referred to asSignal comparison, pilot wire.
7 Settings(continued)
120 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Self-Monitoring
03 15 MON: Peripheral fault Fig. 35This setting determines whether monitoringsignals issued in the event of faults in themeasuring circuits are also entered into themonitoring signal memory.
14 01 MON: Meas.circuit mon. Fig. 36Deactivation or activation of measuring-circuitmonitoring.
Note: If measuring-circuit monitoring isdeactivated, backup overcurrent-time protection will operate only if the binary signal input configured MAIN: M.c.b. tr ip VLS EXT is triggered.
14 02 MON: Threshold value Ineg Fig. 36The threshold value setting determines thepermissible unbalance in the currentmeasuring circuit.
14 03 MON: Trip by Ineg Fig. 36This setting determines whether a “trip” shalloccur in the event of unbalance in the circuit.
14 07 MON: Meas. volt. circuit Fig. 37One of the following monitoring mechanismsis selected:� Vneg� Vneg with current enable� Voltage monitoring with CB contact
enable
Switch on to Fault Protection
11 60 SOTF: Manual close timer Fig. 39Setting for the timer stage that will be startedby a manual close.
11 61 SOTF: Operating mode Fig. 39The operating mode setting determineswhether during elapsing of the timer stage ageneral start will lead to a trip (“Trip withstarting”) or whether the measuring range ofimpedance zone 1 will be extended by theD I S T : k ze H S R zone extension factor(“Zone extension”).
8 Information and Control Functions
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 121
The PD 521 generates a large number of signals,processes binary input signals and acquires measureddata during fault-free operation of the protected object; italso acquires measured fault-related data. For statisticalpurposes a number of counters is maintained. Thisinformation can be read out from the integrated localcontrol panel.
8.1 Measured Values
04 40 OMEAS: Frequency f Fig. 73Display of system frequency.
04 41 OMEAS: Volt. VN-G prim. Fig. 7304 42 OMEAS: Volt. VN-G p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the neutral-point displacement voltage as a primaryquantity or referred to Vnom.
04 43 OMEAS: Current IN prim. Fig. 7304 44 OMEAS: Current IN p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated ground current valueas a primary quantity or referred to Inom.Either the current calculated by the PD 521 or- if ground-fault direction determination usingsteady-state values is ready – the measuredcurrent is displayed.
04 45 OMEAS: Curr. IN,act p.u. Fig. 59Display of the updated value of the activeground current component referred to Inom.
04 46 OMEAS: Curr. IN,reac p.u. Fig. 59Display of the updated value of the reactiveground current component referred to Inom.
04 47 OMEAS: Current IN filt. p.u. Fig. 73Display of the updated value for the harmoniccontent of the ground current, referred toInom. This is only displayed if steady-statecurrent evaluation is enabled.
04 50 OMEAS: Act. power P prim. Fig. 7404 51 OMEAS: Act. power P p.u. Fig. 74
Display of the updated value of active poweras a primary quantity or referred to Snom.
04 52 OMEAS: Reac. power Q prim. Fig. 7404 53 OMEAS: Reac. power Q p.u. Fig. 74
Display of the updated value of reactivepower as a primary quantity or referred toSnom.
04 54 OMEAS: Power factor Fig. 74Display of the updated power factor value.
04 55 OMEAS: Load angle phi A Fig. 7404 56 OMEAS: Load angle phi B Fig. 7404 57 OMEAS: Load angle phi C Fig. 74
Display of the updated load angle value inphases A, B and C.
05 40 OMEAS: Current A prim. Fig. 7305 41 OMEAS: Current A p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated phase current value inA as a primary quantity or referred to Inom.
05 42 OMEAS: Voltage A-G prim. Fig. 7305 43 OMEAS: Voltage A-G p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary value orreferred to Vnom.
05 44 OMEAS: Voltage A-B prim. Fig. 7305 45 OMEAS: Voltage A-B p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary value orreferred to Vnom.
06 40 OMEAS: Current B prim. Fig. 7306 41 OMEAS: Current B p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the phasecurrent in B as a primary quantity or referredto Inom.
06 42 OMEAS: Voltage B-G prim. Fig. 7306 43 OMEAS: Voltage B-G p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary quantityor referred to Vnom.
06 44 OMEAS: Voltage B-C prim. Fig. 7306 45 OMEAS: Voltage B-C p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary quantityor referred to Vnom.
07 40 OMEAS: Current C prim. Fig. 7307 41 OMEAS: Current C p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated phase current value inC as a primary quantity or referred to Inom.
07 42 OMEAS: Voltage C-G prim. Fig. 7307 43 OMEAS: Voltage C-G p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary quantityor referred to Vnom.
07 44 OMEAS: Voltage C-A prim. Fig. 7307 45 OMEAS: Voltage C-A p.u. Fig. 73
Display of the updated value for the phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary quantityor referred to Vnom.
8 Information and Control Functions(continued)
122 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
04 21 FMEAS: Operating time Fig. 78Display of the operating time of the last fault.
The operating time is defined as the timebetween starting and ending of PD 521general starting.
04 22 FLOC: Fault location Fig. 79The fault location of the last fault is displayedin km.
This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521’s distanceprotection function.
04 23 FMEAS: Fault impedance Fig. 79The fault impedance of the last fault isdisplayed in �.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521’s distanceprotection function.
04 24 FMEAS: Fault loop angle Fig. 79The fault angle of the last fault is displayed indegrees.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521’s distanceprotection function. If fault voltages are lowerthan 2 V, the set angle � is displayed.
04 25 FMEAS: Fault current p.u. Fig. 79The fault current of the last fault is displayedreferred to Inom.
. If the fault was detected bythe PD 521’s distance protection function, aphase current is displayed depending on themeasuring loop selected. If the fault wasdetected by the backup overcurrent-timeprotection function, then the maximum phasecurrent is displayed.
04 26 FMEAS: Fault voltage p.u. Fig. 79The fault voltage of the last fault is displayedreferred to Vnom.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521’s distanceprotection function.
04 27 FLOC: Fault location % Fig. 79The fault location of the last fault is displayedreferred to the “F L O C : L i n e r e a c t a n c e ”setting.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521’s distanceprotection function.
04 28 FMEAS: Fault reactance Fig. 79Display of the fault reactance of the last faultin � as secondary quantity.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521’s distanceprotection function.
04 29 FMEAS: Fault react. prim. Fig. 79Display of the fault reactance of the last faultin � as primary quantity.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521‘s distanceprotection function.
04 37 FMEAS: Load impedance Fig. 80Display of load impedance in � whendistance protection starting ends.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521’s distanceprotection function.
04 38 FMEAS: Load angle Fig. 80Display of the load angle in degrees whendistance protection starting ends.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521‘s distanceprotection function.
04 39 FMEAS: Residual current Fig. 80Display of the ground current of the last faultreferred to Inom.This value is only displayed if the fault hasbeen detected by the PD 521‘s distanceprotection function.
04 48 FMEAS: GF angle Fig. 79Display of the ground fault angle of the lastfault in degrees.This value is only displayed if the PD 521’sdistance protection function selects a phase-to-ground loop for measurement.
04 49 FMEAS: Fault IN p.u. Fig. 79Display of the ground fault current of the lastfault referred to Inom.This value is only displayed if the PD 521’sdistance protection function selects a phase-to-ground loop for measurement.
09 20 GFDSS: Voltage VN-G p.u. Fig. 66Display of the neutral-point displacementvoltage of the last ground fault referred toVnom.This value is only displayed if the steady-statepower evaluation function of ground-faultdirection determination is activated.
8 Information and Control Functions(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 123
09 21 GMEAS: Current IN p.u. Fig. 66Display of the ground current of the lastground fault referred to Inom.This value is only displayed if the steady-statepower evaluation function of ground faultdirection determination is activated.
09 22 GMEAS: Curr. IN,act p.u. Fig. 66Display of the active component of the groundcurrent of the last ground fault referred toInom.This value is only displayed if the steady-statepower evaluation function of ground faultdirection determination is activated.
09 23 GMEAS: Curr. IN,reac p.u. Fig. 66Display of the reactive component of theground current of the last ground faultreferred to Inom.This value is only displayed if the steady-statepower evaluation function of ground-faultdirection determination is activated.
09 24 GMEAS: GF durat.steady-st Fig. 64Display of the ground fault duration of the lastground fault when steady-state powerevaluation is being carried out by the groundfault direction determination function.
09 25 GMEAS: IN filtered p.u. Fig. 66Display of the ground current component ofthe last ground fault with the set filterfrequency, referred to Inom.
09 26 GMEAS: GF durat. curr.meas Fig. 65Display of the ground fault duration of the lastground fault when steady-state currentevaluation is being carried out.
8.2 State Signals
After the respective address is selected, the value displayshows a value of "0" for "signal not transmitted" or "1" for"signal transmitted." The conditions that must be satisfiedfor a signal to be transmitted are shown in the figures inChapter 3.
03 26 MAIN: Deactivate prot.EXT Fig.: 303 27 MAIN: Activate prot. EXT Fig.: 303 28 MAIN: Prot. ext. activated Fig.: 304 60 MAIN: Protect. not ready Fig.: 8404 61 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT Fig.: 3504 62 I>SIG: Overcurrent Fig.: 7204 63 MAIN: Ground fault Fig.: 604 64 PSIG: Telecom. faulty EXT Fig.: 4204 65 MAIN: Blocked/faulty Fig.: 8409 35 GFDSS: Direct. forw. /LS Fig.: 5909 36 GFDSS: Direct. backw. /BS Fig.: 5909 37 GFDSS: tVN-G> elapsed Fig.: 5609 38 GFDSS: GF curr. meas. Fig.: 6115 08 PSIG: Enabled Fig.: 4021 13 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked Fig.: 6935 00 FREC: Fault occurrence Fig.: 7535 01 FREC: Signal mem.overflow Fig.: 7735 02 FREC: Faulty time tag36 00 START: General starting Fig.: 6836 01 START: Starting A Fig.: 6836 02 START: Starting B Fig.: 6836 03 START: Starting C Fig.: 6836 04 START: Starting GF Fig.: 6836 05 MAIN: General trip signal Fig.: 6936 09 DIST: Trip signal Fig.: 6936 13 BUOC: Starting Fig.: 3836 14 BUOC: Trip signal Fig.: 3836 15 START: VN-G>> triggered Fig.: 736 16 START: tVN-G>> elapsed Fig.: 736 17 CBF: CB failure Fig.: 5336 18 DIST: Fault forward/LS Fig.: 1736 19 DIST: Fault backward/BS Fig.: 1736 20 PSIG: t1 revers.interlock Fig.: 5036 21 START: Zero sequ. start Fig.: 6836 26 DIST: t1 elapsed Fig.: 2836 27 DIST: t2 elapsed Fig.: 2836 28 DIST: t3 elapsed Fig.: 2836 29 DIST: t4 elapsed Fig.: 2836 30 DIST: t5 elapsed Fig.: 2836 31 DIST: t6 elapsed Fig.: 2836 34 CBF: Input EXT Fig.: 5336 35 PSIG: Send (signal) Fig.: 5136 38 PSIG: Test telecom. EXT Fig.: 5236 45 MAIN: Trip cmd. block EXT Fig.: 6936 46 DIST: Zone extension EXT Fig.: 2336 47 SOTF: Manual close EXT Fig.: 3936 48 PSIG: Receive EXT Fig.: 50
8 Information and Control Functions(continued)
124 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
36 51 MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT Fig.: 3736 60 PSIG: Telecom. faulty Fig.: 4236 63 SOTF: tManual-close runn. Fig.: 3936 64 SOTF: Trip aft. man.close Fig.: 3936 65 DIST: Zone extension Fig.: 2336 66 CBF: tCBF running Fig.: 5336 69 MON: Trip by Ineg Fig.: 3636 70 MON: Warning Fig.: 8236 71 MAIN: General trip cmd. Fig.: 6936 88 FLOC: Trigger EXT Fig.: 7936 89 FREC: Trigger EXT Fig.: 8137 18 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT Fig.: 6937 20 MON: Measuring circ.mon. Fig.: 3537 21 BUOC: Backup DTOC mode Fig.: 3837 24 PSIG: Send (transm. relay) Fig.: 5137 27 PSIG: Ready Fig.: 4037 28 PSIG: Not ready Fig.: 4037 29 PSIG: Receive & gen.start Fig.: 4937 30 PASS: Output 1 (updating) Fig.: 7137 31 PASS: Output 2 (updating) Fig.: 7137 34 PASS: Output 1 (latching) Fig.: 7137 35 PASS: Output 2 (latching) Fig.: 7137 70 PC/ILSA: Test mode EXT Fig.: 8537 71 PC/ILSA: Test mode Fig.: 8537 72 ILSA: Command enable EXT Fig.: 8737 73 ILSA: Command enable Fig.: 8737 74 ILSA: Sig./meas.block EXT Fig.: 8737 75 ILSA: Sig./meas.block Fig.: 8737 76 FREC: Trigger Fig.: 8138 06 MAIN: Auxiliary address Fig.: 338 07 PSIG: Trip signal Fig.: 5038 16 MAIN: Starting trig. EXT Fig.: 6938 20 GFDSS: GF evaluation EXT Fig.: 5438 23 MON: Volt. meas. circuits Fig.: 3738 24 MON: Peripheral fault Fig.: 3538 26 GFDSS: GFD ready Fig.: 5438 27 GFDSS: GFD not ready Fig.: 5438 28 GFDSS: GF ready Fig.: 5438 29 GFDSS: GF not ready Fig.: 5438 37 DIST: Fault in cable run Fig.: 3238 46 MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled Fig.: 338 48 MON: Meas. volt. ok Fig.: 3740 16 PASS: Input 1 EXT Fig.: 7140 17 PASS: Input 2 EXT Fig.: 7140 20 PASS: Output 1 (t) Fig.: 71
54 00 INP: State U 154 03 INP: State U 2
The state of the binary inputs is displayed asfollows:
� Value of "0": not energized
� Value of "1": energized
This display appears regardless of the modesetting for the binary signal inputs.
51 00 OUTP: State K 151 02 OUTP: State K 251 04 OUTP: State K 351 06 OUTP: State K 451 08 OUTP: State K 551 10 OUTP: State K 651 12 OUTP: State K 751 14 OUTP: State K 8
The state of the output relays is displayed asfollows:
� Value of "0": output relay not activated
� Value of "1": output relay activated
57 00 LED: State H 157 02 LED: State H 257 04 LED: State H 357 06 LED: State H 457 08 LED: State H 557 10 LED: State H 657 12 LED: State H 757 14 LED: State H 857 16 LED: State H 957 18 LED: State H 1057 20 LED: State H 1157 22 LED: State H 12
The state of the LED indicators is displayedas follows:
� Value of "0": LED indicator not activated
� Value of "1": LED indicator activated
36 49 PSIG: Blocking EXT Fig.: 40
8 Information and Control Functions(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 125
8.3 Counters
04 00 MAIN: No. general starts Fig. 68Number of general startings.
The counter is reset through address 03 02.
04 05 MAIN: No. def. trip cmds Fig. 70Number of final trip commands.
The counter is reset through address 03 02.
04 10 FREC: No. system disturb. Fig. 75Number of system disturbances since the lastsignal memory reset.
The counter is reset through the followingaddresses:
03 02 M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t
03 06 MAIN: Reset s ig. memory
04 19 MON: No. of mon.signals Fig. 83Number of entries into the monitoring signalmemory.
The counter is reset through address 03 08.
04 20 FREC: No. of faults Fig. 75Number of faults since the signal memorywas last reset.
The counter is reset through the followingaddresses:
03 02 M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t
03 06 M A I N : R e s e t s i g . m e m o r y
09 00 GFDSS: No. GF forwd./LS Fig. 60Number of ground faults in the forwarddirection.
The counter is reset through the followingaddresses:
03 02 M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t
03 04 G F D S S : R e s e t c o u n t e r
09 01 GFDSS: No. GF backwd./BS Fig. 60Number of ground faults in the backwarddirection.
The counter is reset through the followingaddresses:
03 02 M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t
03 04 G F D S S : R e s e t c o u n t e r
09 02 GFDSS: No. GF steady-st. Fig. 60Number of ground faults detected by steady-state power evaluation.
The counter is reset through the followingaddresses:
03 02 M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t
03 04 G F D S S : R e s e t c o u n t e r
09 03 GFDSS: No. of GFs. (curr.) Fig. 62Number of ground faults detected by steady-state current evaluation.
The counter is reset through the followingaddresses:
03 02 M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t
03 04 G F D S S : R e s e t c o u n t e r
8 Information and Control Functions(continued)
126 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
8.4 Control and Testing
00 85 MAIN: Cold restartA cold restart is executed. The setting ispassword-protected (see Section 6.7“Password-Protected Control Operations”).A cold restart means that all settings areerased. The values that the protection deviceoperates with after a cold restart are given inthe address list in the “Default” column. Theyare selected so that the protection device isblocked after a cold restart.
A cold restart only needs to be carried out ifmodules that are activated through address00 80 (IDENT: Add. HW modules) are to bedeactivated.
03 02 MAIN: General reset Fig. 76The following memories are reset:
� All counters
� LED indicators
� Signal memory
� Fault counter
� Measured fault data
� Measured ground fault data
� Fault records
The operation is password-protected (seeSec. 6.7 "Password-Protected ControlOperations").
03 03 GFDSS: Reset meas. values Fig. 67All measured ground fault data are reset.
03 04 GFDSS/TGFD: Reset counter Fig. 63The counter for ground faults detected bysteady-state power evaluation is reset.
03 06 FREC: Reset sig. memory Fig. 76The following memories are reset:
� LED indicators
� Signal memory
� Fault counter
� Measured fault data
� Fault records
03 08 MON: Reset mon. sig. mem. Fig. 83The following memories are reset:
� Monitoring signal memory
� Monitoring signal counter
03 10 LOC: Param. change enabl.This enabling function allows values to bechanged from the local control panel.
03 39 MAIN: Warm restartIn a warm restart the protection devicefunctions as it does when the power supplyvoltage is turned on.
03 40 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER Fig. 69A trip command is issued from the localcontrol panel for a period of 100 ms. Thesetting is password-protected (see Section6.7, "Password-Protected ControlOperations").
03 41 FREC: Triggering USER Fig. 81Fault recording is enabled from the localcontrol panel for 500 ms.
03 42 OUTP: Relay assign.f.testThe relay that is to be tested is selected.
03 43 OUTP: Relay testThe relay selected for testing is triggered forthe set time period (O U T P : H o l d - t i m ef o r t e s t , address 03 44). The operation ispassword-protected (see Section 6.7"Password-Protected Control Operations").Additionally, the test needs to be enabled byactivating the test mode (address 03 12 set to“1“).
03 44 OUTP: Hold-time for testSetting for the triggering time for the selectedoutput time during a function test.
8 Information and Control Functions(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 127
15 09 PSIG: Test telecom. USER Fig. 52A send signal is transmitted for 500 ms. Thispossibility does not exist if “P S I G :O p e r a t i n g m o d e ” is set for "Directtransfer trip underreaching."
21 10 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER Fig. 76The following memories and storage devicesare reset:
� LED indicators
� Measured data for steady-state groundfault direction determination, if“G F D S S : C o m m o n r e s e t ” has beenset accordingly
� Measured fault data.
9 Commissioning
128 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
PreparationAfter the PD 521 has been installed and connected inaccordance with Chapter 5, the commissioning procedurecan begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the followingitems must be checked again:
� Is the protection device connected to the protectiveground at the specified location?
� Does the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltageVA,nom agree with the nominal value of the auxiliarysystem voltage?
� Does the nominal value of the device control voltageVin,nom agree with the nominal value of the systemcontrol voltage?
� Are the current and voltage transformer connections,grounding and phase sequence correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system tomake sure it is properly isolated. The conditions given inVDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supplyvoltage may be turned on. After voltage has been applied,the protection device starts up. During startup variousstartup tests are carried out (see Section 3.18, "Self-Monitoring"). The LED indicators for "Operation" (H2) and"Blocked/Faulty" (H3) light up. After approximately 11 sthe PD 521 is ready for operation. This is indicated whenthe display changes from address 99 00 to the presetaddress (factory-set default: 03 10).
In as-received condition the keyboard is not locked.Therefore all settings can be made after the changeenabling command (address 03 10) has been issued. Theprocedure for entering settings from the integrated localcontrol panel is described in Chapter 6.
If the protection device is to be set and fault records readout through the PC or ILSA interface, then the followingsettings must first be made from the integrated localcontrol panel. (These settings are only possible from thelocal control panel.)
� P C : B a u d r a t e (address 03 81)
� P C : C o m m a n d e n a b l i n g (address 03 80)
� P C : S i g . / m e a s . v a l . b l o c k (address 03 86)
� I L S A : B a u d r a t e (address 03 71)
� I L S A : C o m m a n d e n a b l e U S E R (address 03 70)
� I L S A : S i g . / m e a s . b l c k . U S E R (address 03 76)
� I D E N T : D e v i c e p a s s w o r d 1 (address 00 48)
� I D E N T : D e v i c e p a s s w o r d 2 (address 00 49)
� P C / I L S A : D e v i c e a d d r . ( C U ) (address 03 68)
� P C / I L S A : D e v i c e a d d r . ( P U ) (address 03 69)
� F R E C : T i m e - s w i t c h i n g (address 03 95)
� F R E C : T i m e o f d a y (address 03 96)
� F R E C : D a t e (address 03 97)
� F R E C : Y e a r (address 03 98)
Further instructions regarding these settings are given inChapters 7 and 8.
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 129
After the settings have been made, the following checksshould be carried out once again:
� Does the function assignment of the binary signalinputs agree with the terminal connection diagram?
� Has the correct operating mode been selected for thebinary signal inputs?
� Does the function assignment of the output relaysagree with the terminal connection plan?
� Have all settings been made correctly?
Now the blocks at the following addresses can be cleared:
� Address 03 30: M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n a c t i v e "on".
� Address 21 12: MAIN: T r i p c m d . b l o c k U S E R .
TestingBy using the signals and displays generated by thePD 521 it is possible to determine whether the PD 521 iscorrectly set and properly interconnected with the station.Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicatorsand entered into the signal memory. In addition, thesignals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signaladdresses.
If the circuit breaker will not be operated during testing,the trip command can be blocked through address 21 12or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If a testof the circuit breaker is desired, it is possible to issue a tripcommand for 100 ms through address 03 40 or anappropriately configured binary signal input. Selection ofthe trip command from the integrated local control panel ispassword-protected (see Section 6.7, "Password-Protected Control Operations").
If the PD 521 is connected to a control station it isadvisable to activate the test mode via address 03 12 oran appropriately configured binary signal input. Themessages are then identified accordingly (reason fortransmission: test mode).
Checking the Binary Signal InputsWhen the binary signal inputs are configured for theappropriate signals, then it is possible to determine fromthe signals (see Section 8.2) whether the protection devicerecognizes the binary signals correctly.
� Address 54 00: display of the current state of binarysignal input U1
� Address 54 03: display of the current state of binarysignal input U2
The displayed values have the following meanings:
� Value of "0": Not energized.
� Value of "1": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal inputmode selected.
Checking the Output Relays
It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable timeperiod for test purposes (time setting at address 03 44).First set value „1“ at address 03 12 (PC/ILSA: Testmode USER), then select the output relay to be tested(address 03 42). Test triggering then occurs throughaddress 03 43. It is password-protected (see Chapter 6,Section "Password-Protected Control Operations").
9 Commissioning(continued)
130 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Checking the Protective Function
Checking Distance ProtectionWhen checking distance protection with a single-phasetest device, the measuring circuit monitoring functionshould be deactivated (address 14 01) since it wouldotherwise always operate and thus block distanceprotection after approximately 10 s. If the signal M A I N :M . c . b . t r i p V L S E X T is assigned to a binary signalinput then the latter must have a logic value of "0."
Checking the Fault Detection LogicThe fault detection settings can be illustrated in a V-Idiagram (see Figure 104). The slope of the impedanceline plotted in the V-I diagram is a function of the settingsfor underimpedance fault detection logic and the phasedisplacement between the measured variables (seeFigure 104).
103 Example of the fault detection settings in a V-I diagram
Checking I> (IN), V< and I>>:The phase displacement between the measured variablesV and I should be selected so as to be smaller than theset angle “START: � . ”
Checking Z<:The phase displacement between the measured variablesV and I should be selected so as to be greater than the setangle START: � .
104 Characteristic of underimpedance fault detection logic
When checking underimpedance fault detection logicusing single-phase test current we obtain the followingrelation for the operate condition for a phase-to-phaseloop:
VI
2 Ztest
test� � �
V e
I e2 Z etest
j test
testj0
j Z�
�� � � �
�
�
�
For absolute value (modulus) and angle this means:
V
I2 Ztest
test
� � � 0
� �test Z�
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 131
where:
Z� : starting impedance
�Z : impedance angle
Vtest: test voltage
I test : test current
�test: phase angle between test voltage and testcurrent
The starting impedance is calculated in the range of thereactance limit, that is, for impedance angle �Z in therange �L < �z < 110� as follows:
ZX
sinfw
Z� �
�
Xfw : START: X f w setting
The limit angle �L is defined by the point of intersection ofreactance and resistance limits and is calculated asfollows:
�Lfw
fw
XR
� arc tan
Rfw : S T A R T : R f w P - G orS T A R T : R f w P - P setting
If underimpedance fault detection logic is to be checkedunder all angle conditions, then the starting impedancesfor the individual angle ranges are calculated according tothe following formulas:
Angle Range Starting Impedance
� � �� �Z L Z Rfw
Z� �
cos�
( ) ( )180 180�� � � ��� � �Z L Z R ZZ
fw
Z
bw
fw� � �
cos�
( )180 290�� � � �� �L Z Z X ZZ
fw
Z
bw
fw� � �
sin�
�: S T A R T : � setting
ZZ
bw
fw: S T A R T : Z b w / Z f w setting
When checking phase-to-ground startings, the settingSTART: Z evaluat ion must be taken into account. If"ZPG=VPG / 2*/P" is set then the equations set out forphase-to-phase startings apply. If, on the other hand,"ZPG=VPG /(/P + kG*IN)" is set then the complex groundfactor kG that has been set must be taken into account ifthe setting for D I S T : k G a b s . v a l u e is not equal toone and/or the setting for D I S T : k G a n g l e is notequal to 0�. When the test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operatecondition is obtained:
� �VI
1 k Ztest
testG� � � �
� �V e
I e1 k e Z etest
j
test0 G
j jtest
G Z�
�
� � � � � ��
�
� �
j
For absolute value and angle this means:
V
I1 k 2 k cos Ztest
testG
2G G� � � � �
��� �
� ��
� �
� ��
� � �
� � �test
Z G Z G
Z G Z G
arc tansin k sin
cos k cos�
� � �
� � �
or
� �
� ��
� � �
� � �Z
test G test G
test G test G
k
k�
� � �
� � �arc tan
sin sin
cos cos
where
Z� : starting impedance
�Z : impedance angle
kG : “D I S T : k G a b s . v a l u e ” setting
�G : “D I S T : k G a n g l e ” setting
Vtest: test voltage
I test : test current
�test : phase angle between test voltage and test current
9 Commissioning(continued)
132 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
From the input measured variables the PD 521 calculatesthe residual current IN and the neutral-point displacementvoltage VN-G, , which are used for ground starting. Theyare calculated according to the following formulas:
I I I IN A B C� � �
V13
V V VN G A G B G C G� � � �
For a single-phase test where V V 0A G C G� � , theresult of the calculation formula for VN-G just cited is thatthe START: V N - G > or S T A R T : V N - G > > triggersoperate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V 3 VV
3test N-Gnom
� � � �
VN-G>: S T A R T : V N - G > orS T A R T : V N - G > > setting
For a single-phase test where I I 0B C� � , the followingapplies to currents:
I I Itest N nom� � �
IN>: “S T A R T : I N > “ s e t t i n g
Operation of ground starting is only signaled by the LEDindicator if starting in a phase also operates. Theoperation of ground starting independent of operation ofphase starting can be observed at address 36 21.
The values determined by the PD 521 for the residualcurrent IN and the neutral-point displacement voltage VN-Gare displayed by the operating data displays at addresses04 44 (current) and 04 42 (voltage).
Checking Distance and Directional MeasurementWhen checking the impedance zones using single-phasetest current we obtain the following relation for the operatecondition for a phase-to-phase loop:
VI
2 Ztest
test� � �
V e
I e2 Z etest
j
test0
jtest
Z�
�
� � � ��
�
�
j
For absolute value and angle this means:
VI
2 Ztest
test� � �
� �test Z�
where
Z� : tripping impedance
�Z : impedance angle
Vtest: test voltage
I test : test current
�test : phase angle between test voltage and test current
With the PD 521, the user may choose between apolygonal and a circular tripping characteristic. Thisselection of the tripping characteristic will then govern thecalculation of the tripping impedances.
- -- -
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 133
DIST: Characteristic “Polygon“ SettingThe tripping impedance is calculated in the range of thereactance limits, that is, for impedance angle �Z in therange �L < �Z < 90�, as follows:
Z XZ
� �
sin�
X: Settings D I S T : X1 to D I S T : X 4
The limit angle �L is defined by the point of intersection ofreactance and resistance limits and is calculated asfollows:
�
�
LX
R X� arc tan+
tan
R: Settings
D I S T : R 1 P - G t o D I S T : R 4 P - G or
D I S T : R 1 P - P t o D I S T : R 4 P - P
�: Settings D I S T : �
105 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the “Polygon“ setting
In the range of the resistance limits, that is, for impedanceangles in the range of 0� < �Z < �L, the tripping impedanceis calculated according to the following formula:
Z R
ZZ
� �
�cos sintan
��
�
When checking phase-to-ground loops the complexground factor kG that has been set must be taken intoaccount if the setting for D I S T : k G a b s . v a l u e isnot equal to one and/or the setting for D I S T : k Ga n g l e is not equal to 0�. When the test is carried outusing single-phase test current, the following relation forthe operate condition is obtained:
� �VI
1 k Ztest
testG� � � �
� �V e
I ek e Z etest
j
testj G
j jtest
G Z�
�
� � � � � ��
�
� �
0 1
For absolute amount and angle this means:
V
I1 k 2 k cos Ztest
testG
2G G� � � � �
��� �
� � �
� �� �
�� � �
� � �test
Z G Z G
Z G Z G
kk
�
� � �
� � �
arc tansin sin
cos cos
or
� �� �
�� � �
� � �Z
test G test G
test G test G
kk
�
� � �
� � �
arc tansin sin
cos cos
where
Z� : tripping impedance
�Z : impedance angle
kG : D I S T : k G a b s . v a l u e setting
�G D I S T : k G a n g l e setting
Vtest: test voltage
I test : test current
�test : phase angle between test voltage and test current
9 Commissioning(continued)
134 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
In impedance zone 1 the set zone extension factor kzeenters into the tripping impedance in all fault cases.
Rtrip = kze � R
Xtrip = kze � X
where
Rtrip: actual tripping resistance
Xtrip: actual tripping reactance
kze: SettingD I S T : k z e P - G H S R orD I S T : k z e P - P H S R
R: S etting D I S T : R 4 P - G to D I S T : R 4 P - Gor D I S T : R 4 P - P to D I S T : R 4 P - P
X: S etting D I S T : X 1 t o D I S T : X 4
Whether the zone extension factor kze HSR is active or notis controlled by the following protective functions:
� Switch on to fault protection
� An appropriately configured signal input
� Protective signaling (teleprotection)
DIST: Characteristic “Circle“ Setting
If a circular tripping characteristic has been selected, thetripping impedance is set on the PD 521. If, in addition, thesetting “Arc compensation: yes “ has been chosen then,for the measurement of sine variables, the characteristicshown in Figure 106 is obtained.
106 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the “Circle“ setting
The actual tripping impedance in the ranges� �� �45 � �Z and 135 180�� � � �� �Z ( ) is thencalculated as follows:
Z Ztrip � � �( sin )1 �
In the range � �� �45 � �Z the following relation holds:� � �� � Z
In the range 135 180�� � � �� �Z ( ) we have:� � �� � � �Z 180
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 135
where:
Ztrip : actual tripping impedance
Z : setting D I S T : Z 1 to D I S T : Z 4
�Z : impedance angle
�: setting D I S T : �
When checking phase-to-ground loops the complexground factor kG that has been set must be taken intoaccount if the setting for D I S T : k G a b s . v a l u e isnot equal to one and/or the setting for D I S T : k Ga n g l e is not equal to 0�. When the test is carried outusing single-phase test current, the following relation forthe operate condition is obtained:
� �VI
1 k Ztest
testG� � � �
� �V e
I ek e Z etest
j
testj G
j jtest
G Z�
�
� � � � � ��
�
� �
0 1
For absolute amount and angle this means:
V
I1 k 2 k cos Ztest
testG
2G G� � � � �
��� �
� � �
� �� �
�� � �
� � �test
Z G Z G
Z G Z G
kk
�
� � �
� � �
arc tansin sin
cos cos
or
� �� �
�� � �
� � �Z
test G test G
test G test G
kk
�
� � �
� � �
arc tansin sin
cos cos
where
Z� : tripping impedance
�Z : impedance angle
kG : D I S T : k G a b s . v a l u e setting
�G D I S T : k G a n g l e setting
Vtest: test voltage
I test : test current
�test : phase angle between test voltage and test current
In impedance zone 1 the set zone extension factor kzeenters into the tripping impedance in all fault cases.
Ztrip = kze � Z1
where
Ztrip: actual tripping impedance
kze: SettingD I S T : k z e P - G H S R orD I S T : k z e P - P H S R
Z1: S etting D I S T : Z 1
Whether the zone extension factor kze HSR is active or notis controlled by the following protective functions:
� Switch on to fault protection
� An appropriately configured signal input
� Protective signaling (teleprotection)
9 Commissioning(continued)
136 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Checking the Voltage MemoryIn certain cases the voltage stored by the voltage memoryis used for direction determination. If the voltage memoryis to be tested using a single-phase test device, checkingshould only be done for an A-B fault.
The voltage memory is enabled if the following twoconditions are satisfied:
� Voltage V 0 5 VA B nom� �.6 .
� The frequency is in the range 0 99 101. .� � � �f f fnom nom.
With starting the voltage memory is decoupled from thesynchronizing voltage (VA-B), and the stored voltage canbe used for directional measurement for 2 s maximum.
The PD 521 determines, on the basis of the magnitude ofthe fault voltage, whether the direction will be determinedusing the fault voltage, the stored voltage or the setangle � (D I S T : � ). The following possibilities exist:
Angle for Direction Determination with:
Voltagememory
0.002 V V 0.15 Vnom meas nom� � � � V 0.002 Vmeas nom� �
Enabled �X �X
Not enabled �F �
�X: angle determined using the stored voltage
�F: angle determined using the selected measured variables
Vmeas: selected measuring voltage
The method by which �X is determined is described inChapter 3, Section "Distance and DirectionalMeasurement."
Whether connection of the distance protection function tothe system’s current and voltage transformers involves thecorrect phase can be checked using the operating datadisplays for load angle (addresses 04 55 to 04 57). Theload angles for all three phases must be approximatelyequal. The load angles are only determined if at least 5%of the nominal device current is flowing.
Checking Measuring Circuit MonitoringBoth the current and voltage measuring circuits aremonitored. Operation of the monitoring functions can beobserved by selecting addresses 37 20 (operation ofcurrent or voltage monitoring) or 38 23 (operation ofvoltage monitoring). The monitoring signals can also beentered into the monitoring signal memory and identifiedby reading out the monitoring signal memory.
Monitoring of current-measuring circuits functions only if0.125 � Inom flows in at least one phase. The PD 521determines from the three phase currents the absolutevalue of the negative-sequence component, which iscalculated according to the following formula:
� �I 13
I a I a Ineg A2
B C� � � � � �
a e j�
1200
a e j2 2400�
The operate condition for the current measuring circuits is
I (I ) Ineg neg P,max� � �
where
Ineg >: M O N : T h r e s h o l d v a l u e I n e g setting
With a single-phase test current we obtain
I 13
Ineg test� �
I IP,max test�
For the operate conditions that means:
13
I (Ineg ) Itest test� � � �
0.333 � (Ineg >)
Therefore operation of current measuring circuitmonitoring with single-phase test current is only possible ifthe threshold operate value is set smaller than 0.333.
-
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 137
For two-phase test current in phase opposition we obtain:
I I a I Ineg test test test� � � � � � �
13
13
2 ( )
IP,max = Itest
For the operate condition this means:
13� � � �I I Itest neg test( )
0.577 � (Ineg> )
Therefore operation of current measuring circuitmonitoring with a two-phase test current in phaseopposition is only possible if the threshold operate value isset smaller than 0.577.
If the threshold operate value satisfies the respectivecondition, then current measuring circuit monitoringoperates with a test current greater than 0.125 Inom afterthe operate delay of 10.1 s has elapsed.
Negative-sequence monitoring of the voltage measuringcircuits is enabled if at least one phase-to-ground voltageexceeds the value 0.7 V / 3nom� . Other enabling criteriathat can be activated on an optional basis are the following(selection of enabling criteria at address 14 07):
� A phase current must exceed 0.05 � Inom.
� The signal at the binary signal input configured forA R C : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T must have a logicvalue of "1."
If negative-sequence monitoring has been enabled, thePD 521 determines the absolute value of negative-sequence voltage according to the following formula:
� �V 13
V a V a Vneg A G2
B G C G� � � � � �
a e j�
1200
a e j2 2400�
The trigger threshold of Vneg is set permanently at0.2 V / 3nom� . In the case of a single-phase test usingV V 0B G C G� � , the result of that and of the previouslycited calculation formula for Vneg is that the triggeroperates when the test voltage exceeds the followingvalue:
V 3 0.2V
3testnom
� � �
A signal is not issued until the operate delay totaling 9.8 shas elapsed.
- - -
- -
9 Commissioning(continued)
138 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Checking Backup Overcurrent Time ProtectionThe switch to backup overcurrent time protection (BUOC)— if it has been appropriately set — is brought about bymeasuring circuit monitoring or the tripping of the voltagetransformer miniature circuit breaker on the line side.
If the current exceeds the set threshold operate valueBUOC: I > , then starting occurs in the correspondingphase(s). After the set time delay B U O C : t I > haselapsed, the PD 521 trips. If M A I N : N e u t r a l p o i n tt r e a t ( m e n t ) is set to "Low-impedance-grounding“,then an SN start occurs if the residual current INcalculated by the PD 521 exceeds the set thresholdB U O C : I N > . After the set time delay B U O C : t I N >has elapsed, the PD 521 trips.
The PD 521 calculates the residual current IN according tothe following formula:
I I I IN A B C� � �
From this we obtain in the case of a single-phase test (forexample, IB = IC = 0) a test current of
I I Itest N nom� � �
at which the operate threshold BUOC: I N > is reached.
If the PD 521 is operating with protective signaling orARC, tripping of the backup overcurrent time protectionproceeds after the corresponding tripping times haveelapsed.
Checking Protective SignalingThe protective signaling function can only be checked ifprotective signaling is ready. This is displayed at address37 27 (P S I G : R e a d y).
If protective signaling is not ready, this may be caused bythe following reasons:
� Protective signaling is not activated. This can bechecked at address 15 04 P S I G : E n a b l e dU S E R . (The address is set to "0".)
� Protective signaling has been blocked by triggering acorrespondingly configured binary signal input(P S I G : B l o c k i n g E X T , address 36 49).
� A fault has been detected in the communicationschannel. (This can be checked at address 36 60.)
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible togenerate a send signal for test purposes from theintegrated local control panel (address 15 09) or bytriggering a correspondingly configured binary signal input(P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . E X T ). This pulse will bepresent for 500 ms and is extended for the set reset time.If the “with echo" setting has been selected in theprotection device at the remote station, then the receivedsignal is returned. The "with echo" setting is only active inthe following protective signaling operating modes:
� PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer tripping)
� Zone extension
� Signal comparison release scheme
� Signal comparison blocking scheme
The possibility for testing does not exist ifP S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e has been set forDirect transfer trip underreaching.
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 139
Checking Steady-State Ground Fault DirectionDeterminationIf both the ground current and the neutral-pointdisplacement voltage formed from the three phase-to-ground voltages are available as measured variables, thePD 521 determines the ground fault direction throughevaluation of the ground fault using steady-state values.Switching between steady-state power evaluation andsteady-state current evaluation is done from the integratedlocal control panel or by triggering an appropriatelyconfigured binary signal input.
If allowed by system operation, a ground fault can beclosed on the busbar side (BS) or the line side (LS). ThePD 521 must then transmit the corresponding signals.However, a requirement is that the set thresholds forground current (G F D S S : I N , a c t > / I N , r e a c > B S orL S ) and for the neutral-point displacement voltage(G F D S S : V N - G > ) are exceeded.
Because of the danger of a double ground fault, a functiontest involving the closing of a ground fault will not bepossible in most cases. In these cases the current andvoltage transformers in the system can be connected sothat a function test is possible without a ground fault.
The ground current measured by the PD 521 and theneutral-point displacement voltage are displayed asoperating data in primary quantities and referred to thenominal quantities of the protection device (seeAppendix C, "Measured Operating Data").
Auxiliary Circuit in Resonant-Grounded Systems
First the fuse in phase A of the voltage transformer isremoved and the associated secondary side is short-circuited (see Figures 107 and 108). As a result adisplacement voltage VN-G is obtained whose magnitudeis smaller by a factor of 3 than that of the displacementvoltage in the case of a dead fault to ground.
If the current is measured in a Holmgreen group then thecurrent transformer in A on the secondary side must bedisconnected and short-circuited (see Figure 107).
9 Commissioning
140 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
107 Auxiliary circuit in resonant-grounded systems with Holmgreen group, ground fault in BS direction
(continued)
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 141
A pilot wire is threaded into window-type currenttransformers, and through it a current is taken from phaseB (see Figure 108). The vectorial assignment of currentsand voltages is shown in the phasor diagrams includedwith the terminal connection diagrams.
In the example shown below a ground fault is simulatedon the line side. In order to check a ground fault on thebusbar side, the pilot wire must be threaded in theopposite direction.
108 Auxiliary circuit in resonant-grounded systems with window-type current transformer, ground fault in BS direction
9 Commissioning(continued)
142 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Auxiliary Circuit in Systems with Isolated Neutral
First the fuse in phase A on the primary side of the voltagetransformer is removed and the corresponding secondaryside is short-circuited (see Figures 109 and 110). Theresult is a displacement voltage VN-G whose magnitude is
smaller by a factor of 3 than that of the displacementvoltage in the case of a dead fault to ground.
If the current is measured in a Holmgreen group, then thecurrent transformers in A and B on the secondary sidemust be disconnected and short-circuited (see Figure109).
109 Auxiliary circuit in systems with isolated neutral and Holmgreen group, ground fault in LS direction
9 Commissioning(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 143
A pilot wire is threaded into window-type currenttransformers, and through it a current is taken fromphases B and C (see Figure 110). The vectorialassignment of currents and voltages is shown in thephasor diagrams included with the terminal connectiondiagrams.
In the example shown below a ground fault is simulatedon the line side. In order to check a ground fault on thebusbar side, the pilot wire must be threaded in theopposite direction.
110 Auxiliary circuit in systems with isolated neutral and window-type current transformer, ground fault in LS direction
9 Commissioning(continued)
144 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Completion of CommissioningBefore the protection device is released for operation,make sure that
� All memories are reset(resetting at addresses 03 02 (password-protected)and 03 08)
� The desired reset address is set(setting at address 03 13)
� The block of the trip command is canceled(address 21 12, value of "0")
� Protection is activated (on)(address 03 30, value of "1")
� The password is active (only necessary if the keyboardis to be locked)(address 03 11, value of "1").
As the last step the keyboard may be locked, as describedin Chapter 6. When you leave the device, only the greenLED indicator signaling "Operation" (H2) should be lit up.
145
Listed below are several conceivable problems, theircauses, and possible methods for eliminating them. Thissection is intended as a general orientation only, and incases of doubt it is better to return the PD 521 to themanufacturer. In such cases the packaging instructions inthe “Unpacking and Packing” section of Chapter 5 mustbe followed.
Malfunctioning after Connection to the System:
� The 7-segment displays do not light up.
� Check to see whether there is supply voltage at theequipment connection points.
� Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliaryvoltage is correct. The PD 521 is protected againstdamage resulting from polarity reversal.
Turn off the power supply voltage beforecarrying out further checks. Componentsbehind the front panel are energized.
� Check to see whether the ribbon cable betweeninput-output module and processor board isplugged in. (To do so, remove the front panel.)
Where possible, disconnection of the ribboncable between the processor module and theI/O module should be avoided. Shoulddisconnection have occurred, however, thenthe device needs to be re-initialized by way ofa cold restart.
� Check to see whether fuse F1 (type M1C) on thelower printed circuit board (I/O module) is OK.
If the fuse is defective it should not be replacedwithout first determining the cause of failure. If afuse is replaced without eliminating the problem,there is danger that the damage will spread.
� The protection device signals “Warning” (LED H1).Identify the specific problem by reading out themonitoring signal memory (see 6.5.2 “Monitoring SignalMemory Readout”). The following table lists thepossible monitoring signal entries, the faulty area, thePD 521 response and the mode of the output relayconfigured for the warning.
90 00 MON: EPROMChecksum errors in the EPROM area.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
90 01 MON: RAMWrite or read error in the RAM area.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
90 02 MON: ExceptionProcessor malfunction.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
90 03 MON: ParametersChecksum error in settings area.Response: cold restartOutput relay: latching
90 08 MON: PC interfaceThe PC interface is defective andblocked. Protection continues to operate.Response: PC interface blockingOutput relay: updating
90 09 MON: ILSA interfaceThe ILSA interface is defective and isblocked. Protection continues to operate.Response: ILSA interface blockingOutput relay: updating
90 10 MON: Battery Common-RAMThe voltage of the built-in battery is toolow. Replace the battery. For additionalinstructions see Chapter 11.Response: noneOutput relay: updating
90 12 MON: Monitor sig. memoryThe number of monitoring signals thatcan be stored has been exceeded.Response: No additional monitoringsignals are stored.Output relay: latching
90 13 MON: Signal memoryChecksum error(s) in fault signal area.Response: warm restart or clearing ofsignals for defective faultOutput relay: latching
90 14 MON: Monitor sig. memoryChecksum error in the area of themonitoring signal memory.Response: warm restart or clearing ofmonitoring signalsOutput relay: latching
10 Troubleshooting
!
!
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
10 Troubleshooting(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN146
90 16 MON: PC interfaceThe PC interface is defective.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 17 MON: PC interfaceFault in the PC communications area.Response: no PC communication possibleOutput relay: latching
90 18 MON: PC interfaceFault in the PC communications area.Response: no PC communication possibleOutput relay: latching
90 21 MON: Operat. watchdogProcessor malfunction.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
90 25 MON: NMIProcessor malfunction.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
90 27 MON: ClockProcessor timer defective.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
90 28 MON: Cold restartA cold restart was carried out.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 31 MON: ILSA interfaceFault in the ILSA communication area.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 32 MON: ILSA interfaceGeneral scan fault.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 33 MON: ILSA interfaceBackground general scan fault.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 34 MON: Spontan. sig.bufferFault in spontaneous signal buffer area.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 35 MON: Spontan. sig.bufferMemory overflow.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 36 MON: ILSA/PC telegramTelegram error (message transmissionerror)Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 37 MON: ILSA interfaceTelegram error (message transmissionerror)Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 42 MON: Common-RAMUnknown fault.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 43 MON: PC/ILSA interfaceFault in area of PC/ILSA communication.Response: noneOutput relay: latching
90 70 MON: ChecksumChecksum error in the RAM area.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
94 02 MON: ClockHardware clock fault.Response: warm restart or blockingOutput relay: latching
98 00 MON: Voltage meas. VLSThe voltage transformer m.c.b. on the lineside has tripped.Response: blocking of distance protectionOutput relay: updating
98 01 MON: Volt.meas.circuitsNegative-sequence monitoring hasoperated.Response: blocking of distanceprotectionOutput relay: updating
98 02 MON: Backup DTOCDistance protection has been blocked, butthere has been no switch to backupovercurrent-time protection(BUOC or Backup DTOC).Response: noneOutput relay: updating
10 Troubleshooting(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 147
The device has switched to backupovercurrent-time protection.Response: noneOutput relay: updating
98 05 MON: Curr. meas. circuitsNegative-sequence monitoring hasoperated.Response: noneOutput relay: updating
98 06 MON: Protect.sig.transm.The protective signaling transmissionchannel is faulty.Response: blocking of protective signalingOutput relay: updating
98 07 MON: Measuring circuitsGround starting has operated.Response: noneOutput relay: updating
98 09 MON: Low voltageA phase-to-phase voltage has fallen belowthe 0.4 Vnom� threshold.Response: noneOutput relay: updating
� The PD 521 signals "Block/faulty" (LED H3).
� Check to see whether a “Warning” signal is present.If so, the warning must be identified more closely,as described above.
� Check to see whether the PD 521 is deactivated(off). (This can be checked at address 03 30.)
� Check to see whether the trip command is beingblocked from the local control panel (this can bechecked at address 21 12).
� Check to see whether the trip command is beingblocked via a binary input.
If none of the checks listed above are successful and theproblem is not eliminated, send the unit to themanufacturer along with a detailed description of theproblem.
98 03 MON: Backup DTOC
148
The PD 521 is a low-maintenance device. Thecomponents used in the units are selected so that theymeet exacting requirements. Recalibration is notnecessary.
The PD 521 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of event data and for continued operationof the internal clock in the event of a failure of auxiliaryvoltage. Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per year over aperiod of availability of 10 years. Since the terminalvoltage remains virtually constant until capacity isexhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very lowresidual capacity is reached. Given a nominal capacity of800 mAh and discharge currents of only a few �A duringdevice storage and/or in the range of the self-dischargecurrent during device operation, a correspondingly longservice life results. It is therefore recommended that thelithium battery only be replaced after a period of about tenyears.
The lithium battery can be replaced without soldering.Maintenance work may only be carried out by trainedpersonnel with the auxiliary voltage turned off.
The lithium battery is located on the input-output module.
Components located behind the front panel areenergized. Turn off the power supply voltagebefore opening the unit.
After loosening four bolts on the front side of the frontpanel, the local control module (front panel and processormodule) can be removed once the following plugs havebeen removed first:
� The tab connector on the case
� The tab connector on the lower circuit board(I/O module)
� The ribbon cable connecting the local control module(front panel and processor module) with the I/O module
� The ribbon cable connecting the local control modulewith the optional ILSA interface (-X7 and -X8 or -X9)
Check the position of the connector. Do not allow theconnecting cable to kink.
Where possible, disconnection of the ribboncable between the processor module and theI/O module should be avoided. Shoulddisconnection have occurred, however, thenthe device needs to be re-initialized by wayof a cold restart.
The PD 521 is used as a safety device and must thereforebe routinely checked for proper operation. It isrecommended that the first functional test be carried outafter about 6 to 12 months. Additional functional testsshould be carried out at intervals of about 2 to 3 years –4 years at the maximum.
Routine Functional Testing
The PD 521 digital protection device incorporates in itssystem a very extensive self-monitoring function forhardware and software. The internal structureguarantees, for example, that communication within theprocessor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions thatcannot be checked by the self-monitoring feature withoutrunning a test from the device terminals. The respectivedevice-specific properties and setting parameters must beobserved in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits runto the device from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
11 Maintenance
!
!
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
11 Maintenance(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 149
Analog Input Circuits
Within the PD 521 an analog-digital converter is used toconvert analog measured variables. However, aninstrument transformer, filter, analog multiplexer and1/16 amplifier are also incorporated in each singlemeasuring channel so that a test from the deviceterminals is required in order to verify proper functioning.The supply voltages are monitored continuously.
In conjunction with self-monitoring, moreover, themeasuring circuit monitoring feature integrated into theprotection function can in many cases exhibit a highersensitivity and thus detect additional deviations, dependingon the parameter assignment.
A static test of the analog input circuits is best carried outby operating data measurement of the primary measuredoperating data or by using a suitable testing device. A“small” measured value (in the current path the nominalcurrent, for example) and a “large” measured value (in thevoltage circuit the nominal voltage, for example) should beused to check the effective range of the A/D converter. Inthis way the total modulation range is checked, includinggain change-overs. The gain change-over occurs at amodulation of 1/16 of full scale. In the distance protectionfunction this would be at approximately 6 � Inom in thecurrent path where full modulation is 100 � Inom , and in thevoltage path it would be at approximately 6 V phase-to-ground voltage at the device terminals.
A check of the change-over point of gain change-over ishardly possible since the latter is determined by thehardware configuration. The only indication lies in achange in the measurement resolution. In the currentpath we obtain quantization levels of approximately0 006. � Inom in the lower range and 0 1. � Inom in the upperrange.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <3%. Animportant factor in evaluating device performance is thelong-term performance as determined from comparisonwith previous measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check theresponse and phase relation of the current transformersand the anti-aliasing filter. This is best done by calibratingthe trigger point of the first zone for a two-phaseungrounded fault. The fault current should bedimensioned so that with the set impedance a loopvoltage of approximately 2 V results at the deviceterminals. In addition, a suitable testing device should beused that displays the two-phase ungrounded faultcorrectly.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary since it onlychecks the stability of a very few passive components. Onthe basis of reliability analysis one can expect statisticallythat in 10 years in 1000 devices only one component willbe outside the tolerance zone.
Additional testing in the analog area, such as for theimpedance or starting characteristics, is not necessary inour opinion since complete digital processing of thisinformation is carried out on the basis of the measuredanalog current and voltage values. Proper operation willhave been demonstrated in conjunction with the type test.
The function ‘ground fault direction determination usingsteady-state values’ can be checked in a similar way, thatis by means of operating data measurement and a testdevice.
11 Maintenance(continued)
150
Binary Inputs
The binary inputs are not checked in conjunction with self-monitoring. Therefore a test function is integrated into thedevice software so that the control state of the individualinput can be read out at a matrix point address (54 00 and54 03), where "0" is “low” (not triggered) and "1" is “high”(triggered). This check should be performed for eachinput being used, and if necessary it can be done withoutdisconnecting the unit wiring.
Binary Outputs
There is no monitoring function for the external contactcircuit. In this case triggering of the all-or-nothing relaysmust be initiated either by protection functions or byintegrated test functions. For these testing purposes,control of the output circuits is integrated into the softwareby way of a special control function (address 03 43).Additionally, a test function is integrated into the unitsoftware so that the control state of the individual outputrelay can be read out at a matrix point address (51 00 andup): "0" means that the output relay is inactive and "1"means that the output relay is active.
Serial Interface
The integrated self-monitoring function of the PC interfaceincludes the communications module (UART). The entirecommunications system, including the interconnection andany fiber-optic module, is always completely monitored aslong as a link has been created by the FPC program orthe ILSA protocol.
Other Internal Functions
� Timer StagesAll timer stages in the digital protection device arederived from the precision clock pulse of themicroprocessor. The oscillators have a maximumerror of < � 100 ppm. This means that a timer stage of10 s has a maximum error of 1 ms. For this reason, itis not possible to check the accuracy of the timerstages by functional testing, since the scatter of thestarting and measuring times is greater than this error.
However, the processor clock frequency is checked inconnection with a rough monitoring routine duringstartup of the protection device so that it is possible todetect complete failures. In this check during systemstart the clock frequency of the microprocessor moduleis compared with the setpoint values specified for theunit.
� Power Supply UnitIn the area of system monitoring there is a check forthe presence of internal voltages. The internaloperating voltages used in normal operation haveapproximately 50% of their maximum operational load.
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
12 Storage
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 151
The device must be stored in a dry and cleanenvironment. A temperature range of -25 �C to +55 �C(see Chapter 2) must be maintained. The relativehumidity must not result in either condensation or iceformation.
152 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
The PD 521 is supplied with standard labeling. User-specific labeling can be written onto the reverse side ofthe label strips or onto blank strips available asaccessories. The label strips can be accessed from therear of the front panel.
Turn off any auxiliary voltage before replacing thelabel strips. Components located behind thefront panel are energized.
After four bolts on the front panel face are loosened andthe tab connector (internal grounding) is detached fromthe rear of the front panel, it is possible to remove thelocal control module (front panel and processor module),which is connected to the input-output module by a plug-inribbon cable. The label strip can be removed or insertedfrom the bottom of the rear of the front panel.
Before mounting the front panel, the tabconnector of the grounding cable must beinserted on the rear of the front panel.
Where possible, disconnection of the ribboncable between the processor module and theI/O module should be avoided. Shoulddisconnection have occurred, however, then thedevice needs to be re-initialized by way of a coldrestart.
Labeling can be applied to the label strips by one of thefollowing methods:
� Overhead projector pen, waterproof type, for example,"Stabilo" brand pen, OH Pen 196 PS.
� Typewriter with a pure silk fabric ribbon, for example,“Pelikan“ brand, type 58 A 371.
� Laser printer.
Description Order No.
Label strips(10 sets, blank)
89512-4-0345616
Cover frame with accessories 89412-4-0338264
Battery and bracket 89512-4-0341946
PC connection cable 255 002 096
FPCC parameter assignmentprogram
251 254 271
FPCF operating program 251 254 676
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
!
!
!
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 153
Designs Order-No.
Distance Protection Device PD 521 89521 -0 - ���� 0 0 � -302 -401 -602
-303 -402 -602DesignCase (surface-mounting) 1 Case (flush-mounting) with cover frame 2 ————————————————————————————————— Variants————————————————————————————————— Nominal current Inom
Inom = 1A, 4-phase 1Inom = 5A, 4-phase 2Inom = 5A, 3-phase; Inom = 1A, 1-phase 3
Nominal frequency fnom = 50/60 Hz 2
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nomVA,nom = 24 to 60 V DC / 110 to 250 V DC, 100 to 230 V AC T 3
without ILSA-communications module 0with ILSA-communications module, to plastic fiber 1with ILSA-communications module, to glass fiber 2with ILSA-communications module, RS 422/485 3
————————————————————————————————— Labels & supp. documents Engl. <1> -598Acceptance test certificate B to DIN 50049 - 3.1B <2> -599
<1> Valid for ordering prior to device production. Available as accessory (separate position) for stock items.<2> Must be ordered prior to device production. This order extension no. will not be printed on the name label of the device or shipping box. T Settable range, delivery setting underlined.
14 Ordering Information
154 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
155
A Glossary
B List of Signals
C Address List
D Set Value Record Sheets
E Terminal Connection Diagrams
Appendix
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Appendix
156
Appendix Table of Contents
A Glossary 157
A 1 Function Groups 157A 2 Symbols 158A 3 Examples of Signal Names 162A 4 Symbols Used 162
B List of Signals 163
B 1 Internal Signal Names 163B 2 Protection Communication Signals 165B 2.1 Monitoring Direction 165B 2.1.1 State Signals 165B 2.1.2 Monitoring Signals 165B 2.1.3 Ground Fault Signals 165B 2.1.4 Fault Signals 166B 2.1.5 Operating Value Measurement 166B 2.2 Control Direction 167B 2.2.1 General Commands 167B 2.3 Fault Data Transmission Channels 167B 2.4 System Function Coordination 167
C Address List 168
C 1 Parameters 169C 1.1 Device Identification 169C 1.1.1 Ordering Information 169C 1.1.2 Design Version 169C 1.2 Configuration Parameters 170C 1.2.1 Control Interfaces 170C 1.2.2 Binary Inputs 172C 1.2.3 Binary Outputs 173C 1.2.4 LED Indicators 175C 1.3 Function Parameters 177C 1.3.1 Global 177C 1.3.2 Main Functions 178C 1.3.3 Supplementary Functions 181C 2 Operation 184C 2.1 Measured Operating Data 184C 2.2 State Signals 185C 2.2.1 Functions 185C 2.2.2 Binary Inputs 187C 2.2.3 Binary Outputs 187C 2.2.4 LED Indicators 187C 2.3 Control and Testing 188C 2.4 Monitoring Signals 189C 3 Events 191C 3.1 Event Counters 191C 3.2 Measured Fault Data 192C 3.3 Fault Signals 193
D Set Value Record Sheets 195
D 1 Device Identification 196D 1.1 Ordering Information 196D 1.2 Design Version 196D 2 Configuration Parameters 197D 2.1 Control Interfaces 197D 2.2 Binary Inputs 198D 2.3 Binary Outputs 198D 2.4 LED Indicators 198D 3 Function Parameters 199D 3.1 Global 199D 3.2 Main Functions 200D 3.3 Supplementary Functions 202
E Terminal Connection Diagrams 206
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
A Glossary
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 157
DIST: Distance and directional measurementFREC: Fault recordingFMEAS: Fault data acquisitionFLOC: Fault localizationGMEAS: Ground fault measurement dataGFDSS: Ground fault direction determination using
steady-state valuesI>SIG: Overcurrent (I>) signalIDENT: Device identificationILSA: ILSA communications linkINP: Binary inputLED: LED indicatorsLOC: Local control panelMAIN: Main functionMON: Self-monitoringOMEAS: Operating value measurementOUTP: Binary and analog outputPASS: Pass-through functionsPC: PC communications linkSTART: StartingSOTF: Switch on to fault protectionPSIG: Protective signaling
BUOC: Back-up overcurrent-time protectionCBF: Circuit breaker failure protection
A 1 Function Groups
A Glossary(continued)
158
A 2 Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagramsBinary elementsaccording to DIN 40900 Part 12, September 1992,IEC 617-12: amended 1991
Analog information processingaccording to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981
To document the linking of analog and binary signals,additional symbols have been used, taken from severalDIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to rightand from top to bottom. Other flow directions are markedby an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of thesignal flow, output signals on the right side.
Symbol Description
=
To obtain more space forrepresenting a group ofrelated elements, contours ofthe elements may be joined orcascaded if the following rulesare met:
There is no functional linkagebetween elements whosecommon contour line isoriented in the signal flowdirection.
Note:This rule does not necessarilyapply to configurations withtwo or more signal flowdirections, such as forsymbols with a control blockand an output block.
There exists at least onelogical link between elementswhose common contour lineruns perpendicularly to thesignal flow direction.
Symbol Description
Components of a symbolA symbol consists of acontour or contourcombination and one or morequalifiers.
Control blockA control block contains aninput function common toseveral symbols. It is usedfor the collective setting ofseveral trigger elements, forexample.
Output blockAn output block contains anoutput function common toseveral symbols.
Settable control blockThe four digits represent theaddress under which thefunction shown in the textafter the colon may be set viathe local control panel.
Settable control block withfunction blocksThe digits in the functionblock show the settings thatare possible at this address.The text below the symbolshows the setting and thecorresponding unit ormeaning.
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
A Glossary(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 159
Symbol Description
Static inputOnly the state of the binaryinput variable is effective.
Dynamic inputOnly the transition from value0 to value 1 is effective.
Negation of an outputThe value up to the borderline is negated at the output.
Negation of an inputThe input value is negatedbefore the border line.
Dynamic input with negationOnly the transition from value1 to value 0 is effective.
AND elementThe output variable will be 1only if all input variables are 1.
OR elementThe output variable will be 1only if at least one inputvariable is 1.
Threshold elementThe output variable will be 1only if at least two inputvariables are 1. The numberin the symbol may bereplaced by any othernumber.
Symbol Description
(m out of n) elementThe output variable will be 1only if just one input variableis 1.
The number in the symbolmay be replaced by any othernumber if the number ofinputs is increased ordecreased accordingly.
Delay elementThe transition from value 0 to1 at the output occurs after atime delay of t1 relative to thecorresponding transition atthe input.The transition from value 1 to0 at the output occurs after atime delay of t2 relative to thecorresponding transition atthe input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced bythe actual delay values (inseconds or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flopThe output variable will be 1only if the input variablechanges to 1. The outputvariable will remain 1 for100 ms, independent of theduration of the input value 1(non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the functionblock the monostable flip-flopis retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in thisexample, but it may bechanged to any otherduration.
A Glossary(continued)
160
Symbol Description
Analog-digital converterAn analog input signal isconverted to a binary signal.
SubtractorThe output variable is thedifference between the twoinput variables.A summing element isobtained by changing theminus sign to a plus sign atthe symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binaryoutput signalThe binary output variable willbe 1 if the input signalexceeds a specific threshold.The output variable remains 1until the input signal dropsbelow the threshold again.
Memory, generalStorage of a binary or analogsignal.
Non-stable flip-flopWhen the input variablechanges to 1, a pulsesequence is generated at theoutput.
The ! to the left of the Gindicates that the pulsesequence starts with the inputvariable transition(synchronized start).If there is a ! to the right of theG, the pulse sequence endswith the ending of the 1 signalat the input (synchronizedstop).
Symbol Description
AmplifierThe output variable is 1 only ifthe input variable is also 1.
Band pass filterThe output only transmits the50 Hz component of the inputsignals. All other frequencies(above and below 50 Hz) areattenuated.
CounterAt the + input the inputvariable transitions from 0 to1 are counted and stored inthe function block.At the R(eset) input atransition of the input variablefrom 0 to 1 resets the counterto 0.
Electromechanical drivein general, here a relay, forexample.
Signal level converterwith electrical isolationbetween input and output.L+ = pos. voltage inputL- = neg. voltage inputU1 = device identifier
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
A Glossary(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 161
Symbol Description
Input transducerwith conductor and deviceidentifiers(according to DIN EN 60445)
Conductor identifiers forcurrent inputs:for A: A1 and A2for B: B1 and B2for C: C1 and C2for N: N1 and N2
Conductor identifiers forvoltage inputsvia transformer 1:for A: 1Ufor B: 1Vfor C: 1Wfor N: 1Nvia transformer 2:for A: 2Ufor B: 2V
Device identifiers for currenttransformers:for A: T1for B: T2for C: T3for N: T4for voltage transformer 1:for A: T5for B: T6for C: T7for N: T8for VG-N transformer: T90for voltage transformer 2:for A: T15
Change-over contactwith device identifier
Special symbolOutput relay in normally-energized arrangement(‘closed-circuit operation’).
Symbol Description
PC interfacewith pin connections
MultiplierThe output variable is theresult of the multiplication ofthe two input variables.
DividerThe output variable is theresult of the division of thetwo input variables.
ComparatorThe output variable becomes1 only if the input variable(s)are equal to the function inthe function block.
Formula blockThe output variable becomes1 only if the input variable(s)satisfy the equation in thefunction block.
A Glossary(continued)
162
A 3 Examples of Signal Names
All settings and signals relevant for protection are shownin the block diagrams of Chapter 3 as follows:
Signal Name Description
� FREC: Fault start Internal signal names are notcoded by an address. In theblock diagrams they aremarked with a diamond.The internal signal namesused and their origins arelisted in Appendix B.
DIST:Z1' triggered� 3904 �
DIST:Z1' triggered
Signal names coded by anaddress are referred to onceby their address (in squarebrackets). The source isdocumented in Chapters 7and 8.
Subsequent references usethe signal name only.
MAIN: Control ext.� no (off)
A specific setting to be usedlater on is shown with itssignal name and the settingwith preceding setting arrow.
A 4 Symbols Used
Symbol Meaning
t Time, duration
V Voltage, potential difference
V Complex voltage
I Electrical current
I Complex current
Z Complex impedance
Z Modulus of compleximpedance
f Frequency
� Temperature in °C
� Sum, result
� Unit of electrical resistance
� Angle
� Phase angle. With subscripts:specific angle between adefined current and a definedvoltage.
� Time constant
T Temperature difference in K
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
B List of Signals
163
B 1 Internal Signal Names
Internal signal names are not coded by an address. Theyare indicated by a diamond in the block diagram.
Internal Signal Names Figure
BUOC: Blocked by DTOC 38
BUOC: I N> trigd. 38
BUOC: IA triggered 38
BUOC: IB triggered 38
BUOC: IC triggered 38
BUOC: SN 38
DIST: �corr 15
DIST: �F 16
DIST: �X 16
DIST: �Z 19
DIST: 1VA-B (stored) 15
DIST: Dist. decision Z1 23,27
DIST: Dist. decision Z1E 23,27
DIST: Dist. decision zone 1 23,27
DIST: Dist. decision zone 2 22,26
DIST: Dist. decision zone 3 22,26
DIST: Dist. decision zone 4 22,26
DIST: Imeas 14
DIST: kze HSR = 1.0 23,27
DIST: Meas. zone 1 28
DIST: N1bw 28
DIST: N1fw 28
DIST: N2bw 28
DIST: N2fw 28
DIST: N3bw 28
DIST: N3fw 28
DIST: N4bw 28
DIST: N4fw 28
DIST: N5bw 28
DIST: N5fw 28
DIST: RF 20
DIST: Selected meas.loop A-B 14
DIST: Selected meas.loop A-G 14
DIST: Selected meas.loop B-C 14
DIST: Selected meas.loop B-G 14
DIST: Selected meas.loop C-A 14
DIST: Selected meas.loop C-G 14
DIST: Selected meas.loop P-G 14
DIST: Selected meas.loop P-P 14
DIST: t0 28
DIST: Trip zone 1 29,32,34
DIST: Trip zone 2 29,32,34
DIST: Trip zone 3 29,32,34
DIST: Trip zone 4 29,32,34
DIST: Trip zone 5 29,32,34
DIST: Trip zone 6 29,32,34
DIST: Vmeas 14
DIST: Voltage memory enabled 15
DIST: XF 20
DIST: Zmeas 25
FREC: Fault start 75
FREC: Reset signal mem. 76
GFDSS: 2IN filtered 61
GFDSS: 2VN-G filtered 56
GFDSS: Direction BS 56
GFDSS: Direction LS 56
GFDSS: GF enabled 54
GFDSS: GFD enabled 54
GFDSS: IN> triggered 61
GFDSS: Meas. reset 67
GFDSS: Op. delay IN elapsed 61
GFDSS: P 56
GFDSS: Q 56
GFDSS: VN-G> triggered 56
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Internal Signal Names Figure
B List of Signals(continued)
164
MAIN: Manual trip cmd. 69
MAIN: Manuel reset 76
MAIN: Protection active 3
MAIN: Reset counter GFDSS 63
MAIN: Time tag 75
MAIN: Trip zone 1 69
MON: Current 36
MON: Vneg triggered 37
PSIG: Send int. 52
PSIG: Telecom. faulty int. 50
PSIG: Trip 1 50
PSIG: Trip 2 50
PSIG: Trip enable 50
PSIG: Tripping time elapsed 41
PSIG: Zone ext. 48
SOTF: Zone extension 39
Internal Signal Names Figure
START: Block 3
START: Dist. prot. starting 13
START: Enable 1 8
START: Enable 2 8
START: Enable 3 8
START: Enable ZA-G 11
START: Enable ZB-G 11
START: Enable ZC-G 11
START: Enable ZA-B 11
START: Enable ZB-C 11
START: Enable ZC-A 11
START: IA>> triggered 4
START: IB>> triggered 4
START: IC>> triggered 4
START: IN> triggered 5
START: P-G switching 6
START: SA 13
START: SB 13
START: SC 13
START: SG 6
START: SN0 13
START: SN1 13
START: tIN> elapsed 5
START: Trip VN-G>> 7
START: tVN-G>> elapsed 5
START: VA< triggered 9
START: VB< triggered 9
START: VC< triggered 9
START: VN-G> exceeded 5
START: VN-G>> exceeded 5
START: VPP< triggered 9
START: ZA< triggered 12
START: ZB< triggered 12
START: ZC< triggered 12
START: ZPP< triggered 12
Internal Signal Names Figure
MAIN: Automatic reset 76
MAIN: kInom 2
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
B List of Signals(continued)
165
B 2 Protection Communication Signals
The interface protocol complies with IEC 60870-5-103,Revision 1.5, February 3rd, 1995 ”Protection Commu-nication Companion Standard 1“, compatibility level 2.
B 2.1 Monitoring Direction
B 2.1.1 State Signals
Inf. No. Address Description
Dec Hex
17 11 15 08 PSIG: Enabled
18 12 03 30 MAIN: Protection active
19 13 21 10 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
20 14 37 75 ILSA: Sig./meas.block
21 15 37 71 PC/ILSA: Test mode
22 16 -- -- not supported
27 1B 40 16 PASS: Input 1 EXT
28 1C 40 17 PASS: Input 2 EXT
29 1D 40 18 PASS: Input 3 EXT
30 1E 40 19 PASS: Input 4 EXT
B 2.1.2 Monitoring Signals
Inf. No. Address Description
Dec Hex
32 20 98 05 MON: Curr.meas. circuits
33 21 38 23 MON: Volt.meas. circuits
35 23 98 01 MON: Volt.meas. circuits
37 25 37 21 BUOC: Backup DTOC mode
38 26 04 61 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT
39 27 36 60 PSIG: Telecom. faulty
46 2E 36 70 MON: Warning
47 2F 04 65 MAIN: Blocked/faulty
B 2.1.3 Ground Fault Signals
Inf. No. Address Description
Dec Hex
48 30 -- -- not supported
49 31 -- -- not supported
50 32 -- -- not supported
51 33 09 35 GFDSS: Direct. forw./LS
52 34 09 36 GFDSS: Direct. backw./BS
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
B List of Signals(continued)
166
B 2.1.4 Fault Signals
Inf. No. Address Description
Dec Hex
64 40 36 01 START: Starting A
65 41 36 02 START: Starting B
66 42 36 03 START: Starting C
67 43 36 04 START: Starting GF
68 44 36 71 MAIN: General trip cmd.
72 48 36 14 BUOC: Tripping signal
73 49 04 29 FMEAS: Fault react. prim.
74 4A 36 18 DIST: Fault forward/LS
75 4B 36 19 DIST: Fault backward/BS
76 4C 36 35 PSIG: Send (signal)
77 4D 37 29 PSIG: Receive & gen.start
78 4E 36 26 DIST: t1 elapsed
79 4F 36 27 DIST: t2 elapsed
80 50 36 28 DIST: t3 elapsed
81 51 36 29 DIST: t4 elapsed
82 52 36 30 DIST: t5 elapsed
83 53 36 31 DIST: t6 elapsed
84 54 36 00 START: General starting
85 55 36 17 CBF: CB failure
B 2.1.5 Operating Value Measurement
Inf. No. Address Scal Description
Dec Hex
1441
90 06 41 2.4 OMEAS: Current B p.u.
1452
91 06 4105 45
2.42.4
OMEAS: Current B p.u.OMEAS: Voltage A-B p.u.
1463
92 06 4105 45
04 51
04 53
2.42.4
2.4
2.4
OMEAS: Current B p.u.OMEAS: Voltage A-B p.u.OMEAS: Act. power Pp.u.OMEAS: Reac. power Qp.u.
1474
93 04 4404 42
2.42.4
OMEAS: Current IN p.u.OMEAS: Voltage VN-G,p.u.
1485
94 05 4106 4107 4105 43
06 43
07 43
04 51
04 53
04 40
2.42.42.42.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
OMEAS: Current A p.u.OMEAS: Current B p.u.OMEAS: Current C p.u.OMEAS: Voltage A-G p.u.OMEAS: Voltage B-G p.u.OMEAS: Voltage C-Gp.u.OMEAS: Act. power Pp.u.OMEAS: Reac. power Qp.u.OMEAS: Frequency f
Scal: Scaling
1 only if address 03 74 is set to the value “1“2 only if address 03 74 is set to the value “23 only if address 03 74 is set to the value “34 only if address 03 74 is set to the value “4“5 only if address 03 74 is set to the value “5“
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
B List of Signals(continued)
167
B 2.2 Control Direction
B 2.2.1 General Commands
Inf. No. Address Description
Dec Hex
17 11 15 08 PSIG: Enabled
18 12 03 30 MAIN: Protection active
19 13 21 10 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
B 2.3 Fault Data Transmission Channels
Channel Description
1 Phase current IA
2 Phase current IB
3 Phase current IC
4 Residual current IN
5 Phase-to-ground voltage VA-G
6 Phase-to-ground voltage VB-G
7 Phase-to-ground voltage VC-G
8 Neutral point displacement voltage VN-G
Note: The neutral point displacement voltage iscalculated from the phase voltages.
B 2.4 System Function Coordination
Control Direction
Initiation of generalinterrogation
supported
Time synchronization supported
Monitoring Direction
End of general interrogation supported
Time synchronization supported
Reset FCB supported
Reset CU supported
Start / restart supported
Identification not supported
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
C Address List
168 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
GLOSSARY
Function Groups
BUOC: Back-up overcurrent-time protectionCBF: Circuit breaker failure protectionDIST: Distance and directional measurementFLOC: Fault localizationFMEAS: Fault data acquisitionFREC: Fault recordingGFDSS: Ground fault direction determination using
steady-state valuesGMEAS: Ground fault measurement dataIDENT: Device identificationILSA: ILSA communications linkINP: Binary inputI>SIG: Overcurrent (I>) signalLED: LED indicatorsLOC: Local control panelMAIN: Main functionMON: Self-monitoringOMEAS: Operating value measurementOUTP: Binary and analog outputPASS: Pass-through functionsPC: PC communications linkPSIG: Protective signalingSOTF: Switch on to fault protectionSTART: Starting
Changing Values
on: "on" (on-line) means that the value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.
off: "off" (off-line) means that the value can be changed provided that the protective function is disabled.
-: "-" means that the value cannot be modified by control action.
KEY
f): A change in value is possible without activating the value-change enabling function.
n): Indication "..." is possible and means that no value has been measured.
o): Indication "-..-" is possible and means that thevalue is out of range.
p): The value change is password-protected.u): The setting "�" is represented by the "0--0"
display.
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 169
C 1 Parameters
C 1.1 Device Identification
C 1.1.1 Ordering Information
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
00 00 IDENT: Device type - 521 PD 521
00 48 IDENT: Device password 1 off 0.00 0.00 ... 99.99 0.0100 49 IDENT: Device password 2 off 0.00 0.00 ... 99.99 0.01
00 50 IDENT: Auxiliary voltage off 0 0 ... 999 V 100 51 IDENT: Nominal voltage off 0 0 ... 999 V 100 52 IDENT: Nominal current off 0.0 0.0 ... 9.9 A 0.100 53 IDENT: Nominal frequency off 0.0 0.0 ... 99.9 Hz 0.100 54 IDENT: Nominal current IN off 0.0 0.0 ... 99.9 A 0.1
00 80 IDENT: Add. HW modules off 4176 4176 Without4432 ILSA interface
C 1.1.2 Design Version
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
02 00 IDENT: Data model - 101 0 ... 9999 Version number 102 20 IDENT: SW version - 1.2x 0.00 ... 99.99 Version number 0.0102 60 IDENT: Auxiliary address For internal use
C Address List(continued)
170 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
C 1.2 Configuration Parameters
C 1.2.1 Control Interfaces
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
03 11 LOC: Access lock active on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
03 12 PC/ILSA: Test mode USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
03 13 LOC: Autom. return addr. on 0310 0 ... 9999 xxyy 103 14 LOC: Autom. return time on 100 60 ... 1200 s 10
03 50 ILSA: Delta V on 3.0 0.0 ... 15.0 %Vnom 0.503 51 ILSA: Delta I on 3.0 0.0 ... 15.0 %Inom 0.503 52 ILSA: Delta f on 2.0 0.0 ... 2.0 %fnom 0.103 53 ILSA: Delta t on 1 0 ... 15 min 103 54 ILSA: Delta P on 15.0 0.0 ... 15.0 %Snom 0.5
03 55 PC: Delta V on 3.0 0.0 ... 15.0 %Vnom 0.503 56 PC: Delta I on 3.0 0.0 ... 15.0 %Inom 0.503 57 PC: Delta f on 2.0 0.0 ... 2.0 %fnom 0.103 58 PC: Delta t on 1 0 ... 15 min 103 59 PC: Delta P on 15.0 0.0 ... 15.0 %Snom 0.5
03 68 PC/ILSA: Device addr.(CU) off 1 0 ... 254 } must be set 103 69 PC/ILSA: Device addr.(PU) off 1 0 ... 255 } identical 1
03 70 ILSA: Command enable USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
03 71 ILSA: Baud rate off 19200 50 Baud100 Baud200 Baud300 Baud600 Baud1200 Baud2400 Baud4800 Baud9600 Baud19.2 kBaud
03 74 ILSA: Transm. cycl. data on 0 0 Without 1 IB 2 IB, VA-B 3 IB, VA-B, P, Q 4 IN, VN-G 5 1+IA,IC,VAG,VBG,VCG,P,Q,f 6 IN,VN-G, IN,act, IN,reac 9 6+IN,fil 11 1+4 12 2+4 13 3+4 15 5+4 16 5+6 19 5+9
03 76 ILSA: Sig./meas.blck.USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
03 77 ILSA: Contin.general scan on � 10 ... 9000/� s 10 u)
03 80 PC: Command enabling on 1 0 / 1 no / yes
03 81 PC: Baud rate off 9600 300 Baud600 Baud1200 Baud2400 Baud4800 Baud9600 Baud
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 171
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
03 84 PC: Transm. cycl. data on 0 0 Without 1 IB 2 IB, VA-B 3 IB, VA-B, P, Q 4 IN, VN-G 5 1+IA,IC,VAG,VBG,VCG,P,Q,f 6 IN,VN-G, IN,act, IN,reac 9 6+IN,fil 11 1+4 12 2+4 13 3+4 15 5+4 16 5+6 19 5+9
03 86 PC: Sig./meas. val.block. on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
C Address List(continued)
172 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
C 1.2.2 Binary Inputs
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
54 01 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1 off - - Without function54 04 INP: Fct. assignm. U 2 off - 0326 MAIN: Deactivate prot.EXT
0327 MAIN: Activate prot. EXT0461 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT0464 PSIG: Telecom. faulty EXT3634 CBF: Input EXT3638 PSIG: Test telecom. EXT3645 MAIN: Trip cmd. block EXT3646 DIST: Zone extension EXT3647 SOTF: Manual close EXT3648 PSIG: Receive EXT3649 PSIG: Blocking EXT3651 MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT3688 FLOC: Trigger EXT3689 FREC: Trigger EXT3718 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT3770 PC/ILSA: Test mode EXT3772 ILSA: Command enable EXT3774 ILSA: Sig./meas.block EXT3816 MAIN: Starting trig. EXT3820 GFDSS: GF evaluation EXT4016 PASS: Input 1 EXT4017 PASS: Input 2 EXT6501 MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT
54 02 INP: Operating mode U 1 off 1 0 / 1 active "low" / "high"54 05 INP: Operating mode U 2 off 1 0 / 1 active "low" / "high"
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 173
C 1.2.3 Binary Outputs
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
51 01 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1 off - - Without function51 03 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2 off - 0328 MAIN: Prot. ext.activated51 05 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 3 off - 0340 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER51 07 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 4 off - 0461 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT51 09 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 5 off - 0462 I>SIG: Overcurrent51 11 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 6 off - 0463 MAIN: Ground fault51 13 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 7 off - 0465 MAIN: Blocked/faulty51 15 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 8 off - 0935 GFDSS: Direct. forw./LS
0936 GFDSS: Direct. backw./BS0937 GFDSS: tVN-G> elapsed0938 GFDSS: GF curr. meas.1508 PSIG: Enabled1509 PSIG: Test telecom. USER2113 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked3500 FREC: Fault occurence3600 START: General starting3601 START: Starting A3602 START: Starting B3603 START: Starting C3604 START: Starting GF3605 MAIN: General trip signal3609 DIST: Trip signal3613 BUOC: Starting3614 BUOC: Trip signal3615 START: VN-G>> triggered3616 START: tVN-G>> elapsed3617 CBF: CB failure3618 DIST: Fault forward /LS3619 DIST: Fault backward /BS3620 PSIG: t1 revers.interlock3621 START: Zero sequ. start.3626 DIST: t1 elapsed3627 DIST: t2 elapsed3628 DIST: t3 elapsed3629 DIST: t4 elapsed3630 DIST: t5 elapsed3631 DIST: t6 elapsed3646 DIST: Zone extension EXT3648 PSIG: Receive EXT3649 PSIG: Blocking EXT3651 MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT3660 PSIG: Telecom. faulty3663 SOTF: tManual-close runn.3664 SOTF: Trip aft. man.close3665 DIST: Zone extension3666 CBF: tCBF running3669 MON: Trip by Ineg3670 MON: Warning3671 MAIN: General trip cmd.3688 FLOC: Trigger EXT3720 MON: Measuring circ.mon.3721 BUOC: Backup DTOC mode3724 PSIG: Send (transm.relay)3727 PSIG: Ready3728 PSIG: Not ready3729 PSIG: Receive & gen.start3771 PC/ILSA: Test mode3773 ILSA: Command enable3775 ILSA: Sig./meas.block3776 FREC: Trigger3807 PSIG: Trip signal3816 MAIN: Starting trig. EXT3820 GFDSS: GF evaluation EXT3823 MON: Volt. meas. circuits3824 MON: Peripheral fault
C Address List(continued)
174 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
3826 GFDSS: GFD ready3827 GFDSS: GFD not ready3828 GFDSS: GF ready3829 GFDSS: GF not ready3837 DIST: Fault in cable run3848 MON: Meas.volt. ok4016 PASS: Input 1 EXT4017 PASS: Input 2 EXT4020 PASS: Output 1 (t)
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 175
C 1.2.4 LED Indicators
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
57 01 LED: Fct. assignm. H 1 - 36.70 3670 MON: Warning57 03 LED: Fct. assignm. H 2 - 03.31 0331 MAIN: Operation57 05 LED: Fct. assignm. H 3 - 04.65 0465 MAIN: Blocked/faulty
57 07 LED: Fct. assignm. H 4 off - - Without function57 09 LED: Fct. assignm. H 5 off - 0328 MAIN: Prot. ext.activated57 11 LED: Fct. assignm. H 6 off - 0340 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER57 13 LED: Fct. assignm. H 7 off - 0461 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT57 15 LED: Fct. assignm. H 8 off - 0462 I>SIG: Overcurrent57 17 LED: Fct. assignm. H 9 off - 0463 MAIN: Ground fault57 19 LED: Fct. assignm. H 10 off - 0935 GFDSS: Direct. forw./LS57 21 LED: Fct. assignm. H 11 off - 0936 GFDSS: Direct. backw./BS57 23 LED: Fct. assignm. H 12 off - 0937 GFDSS: tVN-G> elapsed
0938 GFDSS: GF curr. meas.1508 PSIG: Enabled1509 PSIG: Test telecom. USER2113 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked3500 FREC: Fault occurence3600 START: General starting3601 START: Starting A3602 START: Starting B3603 START: Starting C3604 START: Starting GF3605 MAIN: General trip signal3609 DIST: Trip signal3613 BUOC: Starting3614 BUOC: Trip signal3615 START: VN-G>> triggered3616 START: tVN-G>> elapsed3617 CBF: CB failure3618 DIST: Fault forward /LS3619 DIST: Fault backward /BS3620 PSIG: t1 revers.interlock3621 START: Zero sequ. start.3626 DIST: t1 elapsed3627 DIST: t2 elapsed3628 DIST: t3 elapsed3629 DIST: t4 elapsed3630 DIST: t5 elapsed3631 DIST: t6 elapsed3635 PSIG: Send (signal)3646 DIST: Zone extension EXT3649 PSIG: Blocking EXT3651 MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT3660 PSIG: Telecom. faulty3663 SOTF: tManual-close runn.3664 SOTF: Trip aft. man.close3665 DIST: Zone extension3666 CBF: tCBF running3669 MON: Trip by Ineg3671 MAIN: General trip cmd.3688 FLOC: Trigger EXT3720 MON: Measuring circ.mon.3721 BUOC: Backup DTOC mode3727 PSIG: Ready3728 PSIG: Not ready3729 PSIG: Receive & gen.start3730 PASS: Output 1 (updating)3731 PASS: Output 2 (updating)3734 PASS: Output 1 (latching)3735 PASS: Output 2 (latching)3771 PC/ILSA: Test mode3773 ILSA: Command enable3775 ILSA: Sig./meas.block3776 FREC: Trigger
C Address List(continued)
176 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
3807 PSIG: Trip signal3816 MAIN: Starting trig. EXT3820 GFDSS: GF evaluation EXT3823 MON: Volt. meas. circuits3824 MON: Peripheral fault3826 GFDSS: GFD ready3827 GFDSS: GFD not ready3828 GFDSS: GF ready3829 GFDSS: GF not ready3837 DIST: Fault in cable run3848 MON: Meas.volt. ok4016 PASS: Input 1 EXT4017 PASS: Input 2 EXT4020 PASS: Output 1 (t)
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 177
C 1.3 Function Parameters
C 1.3.1 Global
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
03 30 MAIN: Protection active on 0 0 / 1 no (=off) / yes (=on)
10 03 MAIN: Nominal current off 1 1 1 A 5 5 A
10 04 MAIN: Connect. meas.circ. on 1 1 Forward 2 Reverse
10 30 MAIN: System frequency off 50 50 50 Hz 60 60 Hz
10 40 MAIN: Transfer for 1p on 1 1 Ground 2 P or G =f(IP,med, IP,max)
10 41 MAIN: Phase priority 2pN on 1 1 Phase-to-phase loop 2 Phase-to-ground loop Vmin 3 C before A acyclic 4 A before B before C cycl. 5 A before C acyclic 6 C before B before A cycl. 7 B before A acyclic 8 A before B acyclic 9 C before B acyclic 10 B before C acyclic
10 48 MAIN: Neutral-point treat on 1 1 Low-impedance grounding 2 Isol./reson. w. start P-G 3 Isol./reson.w/o start P-G 4 Short-duration grounding
10 49 MAIN: Rotary field on 1 1 Clockwise rotation 2 Anti-clockwise rotation
21 12 MAIN: Trip cmd.block USER on 1 0 / 1 no / yes
C Address List(continued)
178 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
C 1.3.2 Main Functions
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
Starting
10 36 START: tI>> on 0.00 0.00 ... 0.50 s 0.01
10 50 START: Xfw on 10.0 0.10 ... 300.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.100.020 ... 60.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
10 51 START: Rfw P-G on 10.0 0.10 ... 300.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.1010 52 START: Rfw P-P on 10.0 0.020 ... 60.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
10 53 START: Zbw/Zfw on 0.50 0.10 ... 4.00 0.01
10 54 START: I>> on 1.00 0.50 ... 8.00 Inom 0.0510 55 START: IN> on 0.20 0.10 ... 2.00 Inom 0.05
10 56 START: VN-G> on 0.10 0.02 ... 1.00 Vnom/�3 0.01
10 57 START: tIN> on 0.10 0.00 ... 0.50 s 0.01
10 60 START: Trip tVN-G>> on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
10 61 START: tVN-G>> on 1.00 0.00 ... 60.00 s 0.01
10 62 START: VN-G>> on 0.50 0.20 ... 1.00 Vnom/�3 0.0110 63 START: ß on 30 15 ... 65 ° 1
10 67 START: Operating mode on 0 0 W/o V</Z< starting 1 With V</Z< starting P-G 2 With V</Z< start.P-G, P-P
10 68 START: I> (Imin) on 0.20 0.10 ... 1.00 Inom 0.0110 69 START: V< on 0.70 0.00 ... 0.90 Vnom or Vnom/�3 0.01
25 93 START: Z evaluation on 1 1 ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN) 2 ZPG=VPG/2*IP
Distance and DirectionalMeasurement
12 00 DIST: Zone 4 on 1 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Section cable - line 4 Section line - cable
12 01 DIST: X1 (polygon) on 10.0 0.10 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.0112 02 DIST: X2 (polygon) on 20.0 10.00 ... 200.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.1012 03 DIST: X3 (polygon) on 30.0 0.020 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.00212 04 DIST: X4 (polygon) on 40.0 2.00 ... 40.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
12 05 DIST: R1 P-G (polygon) on 10.0 0.10 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.0112 06 DIST: R1 P-P (polygon) on 10.0 10.00 ... 200.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.1012 07 DIST: R2 P-G (polygon) on 20.0 0.020 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.00212 08 DIST: R2 P-P (polygon) on 20.0 2.00 ... 40.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.02012 09 DIST: R3 P-G (polygon) on 30.012 10 DIST: R3 P-P (polygon) on 30.012 11 DIST: R4 P-G (polygon) on 40.012 12 DIST: R4 P-P (polygon) on 40.0
12 13 DIST: � (polygon) on 75 40 ... 90 ° 1
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 179
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
12 23 DIST: Direction N1 on 1 1 Forward directional12 24 DIST: Direction N2 on 1 2 Backward directional12 25 DIST: Direction N3 on 1 3 Non-directional12 26 DIST: Direction N4 on 112 27 DIST: Direction N5 on 1
12 28 DIST: t1 on 0.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)12 29 DIST: t2 on 1.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)12 30 DIST: t3 on 2.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)12 31 DIST: t4 on 3.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)12 32 DIST: t5 on 4.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)12 33 DIST: t6 on 5.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)
12 34 DIST: kze P-G HSR on 1.20 1.00 ... 99.95 0.05100.0 ... 450.0 0.1
12 35 DIST: kze P-P HSR on 1.20 1.00 ... 99.95 0.05100.0 ... 450.0 0.1
12 36 DIST: kG angle on 0 0 0° 4 4.5° 9 9° 13 13.5° 18 18° 22 22.5° 27 27° 31 31.5° 36 36° 40 40.5° 45 45 49 49.5° 54 54° 58 58.5° 63 63° 67 67.5° 72 72° 76 76.5° 81 81° 85 85.5° 90 90° 94 94.5° 99 99°103 103.5°108 108°112 112.5°117 117°121 121.5°126 126°130 130.5°135 135°139 139.5°144 144°148 148.5°153 153°157 157.5°162 162°166 166.5°171 171°175 175.5°180 180°- 4 -4.5°- 9 -9°- 13 -13.5°- 18 -18°
C Address List(continued)
180 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
- 22 -22.5°- 27 -27°- 31 -31.5°- 36 -36°- 40 -40.5°- 45 -45°- 49 -49.5°- 54 -54°- 58 -58.5°- 63 -63°- 67 -67.5°- 72 -72°- 76 -76.5°- 81 -81°- 85 -85.5°- 90 -90°- 94 -94.5°- 99 -99°-103 -103.5°-108 -108°-112 -112.5°-117 -117°-121 -121.5°-126 -126°-130 -130.5°-135 -135°-139 -139.5°-144 -144°-148 -148.5°-153 -153°-157 -157.5°-162 -162°-166 -166.5°-171 -171°-175 -175.5°-180 -180°
12 37 DIST: kG abs. value on 1.00 0.00 ... 8.00 0.01
12 38 DIST: Arc comp. (circle) on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
12 40 DIST: Characteristic on 1 1 Polygon 2 Circle
12 41 DIST: � (circle) on 75 10 ... 90 ° 1
12 42 DIST: Z1 (circle) on 10.0 0.10 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.0112 43 DIST: Z2 (circle) on 20.0 10.00 ... 200.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.1012 44 DIST: Z3 (circle) on 30.0 0.020 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.00212 45 DIST: Z4 (circle) on 40.0 2.00 ... 40.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 181
C 1.3.3 Supplementary Functions
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
Back-Up Overcurrent-Time Protection
14 00 BUOC: Operating mode on 0 0 w/o backup DTOC 1 With backup DTOC
17 00 BUOC: I> on 1.00 0.50 ... 8.00 Inom 0.0517 03 BUOC: IN> on 0.20 0.10 ... 2.00 Inom 0.0517 04 BUOC: tI> on 1.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)17 08 BUOC: tIN> on 1.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)
Circuit Breaker FailureProtection
11 67 CBF: tCBF on 0.30 0.00 ... 10.00 s 0.01
Fault Localization
10 05 FLOC: Line length on 10.0 0.01 ... 9.99 Refer. value (e.g. km) 0.0110.0 ... 500.0 0.1
10 11 FLOC: Start determination on 1 1 Fault end 2 Fault end/ trip during t1 3 Trip or trigger
10 12 FLOC: Line reactance on 10.0 0.10 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.0110.00 ... 200.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.100.020 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.0022.00 ... 40.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
Fault Recording
03 78 FREC: Pre-fault time on 40 10 ... 100 ms 103 79 FREC: Post-fault time on 40 10 ... 250 ms 1
03 95 FREC: Time-switching on 0 0 Standard time 1 Daylight saving time
03 96 FREC: Time of day on 0.00 0.00 ... 23.59 hh:mm 0.0103 97 FREC: Date on 1.01 1.01 ... 31.12 dd.mm 0.0103 98 FREC: Year on 1989 1980 ... 2079 1
Ground Fault DirectionDetermination UsingSteady-State Values
16 60 GFDSS: Enabled on 0 0 / 1 no / yes16 61 GFDSS: tVN-G> on 1.00 0.02 ... 9.99 s 0.0116 62 GFDSS: VN-G> on 0.25 0.02 ... 1.00 Vnom 0.01
16 63 GFDSS: Operating mode on 1 1 cos phi circuit 2 sin phi circuit
16 64 GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac LS on 0.050 0.003 ... 1.000 Inom 0.00116 65 GFDSS: Sector angle LS on 86 80 ... 89 ° 1
16 66 GFDSS: Operate delay LS on 0.10 0.00 ... 9.99/� s 0.01 u)10.0 ... 60.0 0.1
16 67 GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac BS on 0.050 0.003 ... 1.000 Inom 0.00116 68 GFDSS: Sector angle BS on 86 80 ... 89 ° 1
C Address List(continued)
182 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
16 69 GFDSS: Operate delay BS on 0.10 0.00 ... 9.99/� s 0.01 u)10.0 ... 60.0 0.1
16 70 GFDSS: Connect.meas.circ. on 1 1 Forward 2 Reverse
16 71 GFDSS: Common reset on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
16 72 GFDSS: Release delay LS on 0.00 0.00 ... 9.99 s 0.0116 73 GFDSS: Release delay BS on 0.00 0.00 ... 9.99 s 0.01
16 90 GFDSS: Select GFD/GF on 1 1 Steady-state power 2 Steady-state current
16 91 GFDSS: f0 (GFD) on 50 50 / 250 Hz16 92 GFDSS: f0 (GF) on 50 50 / 250 Hz
16 93 GFDSS: IN> on 0.050 0.003 ... 1.000 Inom 0.001
16 94 GFDSS: Operate delay IN on 0.10 0.00 ... 9.99/� s 0.01 u)10.0 ... 60.0 0.1
16 95 GFDSS: Release delay IN on 0.00 0.00 ... 9.99 s 0.01
Overcurrent (I>) Signal
14 04 I>SIG: Threshold value on 1.10 0.20 ... 8.00 Inom 0.01
14 08 I>SIG: t on 5.00 0.00 ... 9.99/� s 0.01 u)10.0 ... 60.0 0.1
Self-Monitoring
03 15 MON: Peripheral fault on 1 0 W/o mon.sig. memory entry 1 With mon.sig.memory entry
14 01 MON: Meas.circuit mon. on 1 0 / 1 no / yes14 02 MON: Threshold value Ineg on 0.20 0.10 ... 1.00 IP,max 0.0514 03 MON: Trip by Ineg on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
14 07 MON: Meas. volt. circuit on 1 1 Vneg 2 Vneg with current enable 3 Volt.mon.w.CB cont.enable
Operation ValueMeasurement
10 01 OMEAS: Inom,prim. C.T. on 1000 1 ... 3000 A 110 02 OMEAS: Vnom,prim. V.T. on 100.0 0.1 ... 800.0 kV 0.1
Pass-Through Functions
17 21 PASS: tEM1 on 0.00 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)
17 30 PASS: Op. mode tEM1 on 1 1 Operate delayed 2 Passing make contact 3 Passing break contact
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 183
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
Protective Signaling
15 00 PSIG: Operating mode on 3 1 Direct trans.trip underr. 2 PUTT 3 Zone extension 4 Signal comp.releas.scheme 5 Signal comp. block.scheme 6 Signal comp. pilot wire 7 Reverse interlocking
15 02 PSIG: Reset time send on 0.25 0.00 ... 10.00 s 0.01
15 03 PSIG: Echo on receive on 0 0 / 1 without / with15 04 PSIG: Enabled USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
15 11 PSIG: Tripping time on 0.08 0.00 ... 10.00/� s 0.01 u)
15 12 PSIG: DC loop op. mode on 1 1 Transm.relay break cont. 2 Transm.relay make contact
Switch On To FaultProtection
11 60 SOTF: Manual close timer on 1.00 0.00 ... 10.00 s 0.01
11 61 SOTF: Operating mode on 1 1 Trip with starting 2 Zone extension
C Address List(continued)
184 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
C 2 Operation
C 2.1 Measured Operating Data
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
04 40 OMEAS: Frequency f - 0.00 ... 99.99 Hz 0.01 n)
04 41 OMEAS: Volt. VN-G, prim. - 0.00 ... 99.99 kV 0.01 n)o)04 42 OMEAS: Volt. VN-G, p.u. - 0.000 ... 1.500 Vnom/�3 0.001 n)o)
04 43 OMEAS: Current IN prim. - 0 ... 9999 A 1 n)o)04 44 OMEAS: Current IN p.u. - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)04 45 OMEAS: Curr. IN,act. p.u. - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)04 46 OMEAS: Curr. IN,reac p.u. - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)04 47 OMEAS: Curr. IN filt. p.u - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)
04 50 OMEAS: Act. power P prim. - -999 ... 999 MW 1 n)o)04 51 OMEAS: Act. power P p.u. - -7.50 ... 7.50 Snom 0.01 n)o)04 52 OMEAS: Reac. power Q prim - -999 ... 999 MVA 1 n)o)04 53 OMEAS: Reac. power Q p.u. - -7.50 ... 7.50 Snom 0.01 n)o)
04 54 OMEAS: Power factor - -1.00 ... 1.00 0.01 n)
04 55 OMEAS: Load angle phi A - -180 ... 180 ° 1 n)04 56 OMEAS: Load angle phi B - -180 ... 180 ° 1 n)04 57 OMEAS: Load angle phi C - -180 ... 180 ° 1 n)
05 40 OMEAS: Current A prim. - 0 ... 9999 A 1 n)o)05 41 OMEAS: Current A p.u. - 0.00 ... 30.00 Inom 0.01 n)o)
05 42 OMEAS: Voltage A-G prim. - 0.0 ... 999.9 kV 0.1 n)o)05 43 OMEAS: Voltage A-G p.u. - 0.00 ... 1.00 Vnom 0.01 n)o)05 44 OMEAS: Voltage A-B prim. - 0.0 ... 999.9 kV 0.1 n)o)05 45 OMEAS: Voltage A-B p.u. - 0.00 ... 2.00 Vnom 0.01 n)o)
06 40 OMEAS: Current B prim. - 0 ... 9999 A 1 n)o)06 41 OMEAS: Current B p.u. - 0.00 ... 30.00 Inom 0.01 n)o)
06 42 OMEAS: Voltage B-G prim. - 0.0 ... 999.9 kV 0.1 n)o)06 43 OMEAS: Voltage B-G p.u. - 0.00 ... 1.00 Vnom 0.01 n)o)06 44 OMEAS: Voltage B-C prim. - 0.0 ... 999.9 kV 0.1 n)o)06 45 OMEAS: Voltage B-C p.u. - 0.00 ... 2.00 Vnom 0.01 n)o)
07 40 OMEAS: Current C prim. - 0 ... 9999 A 1 n)o)07 41 OMEAS: Current C p.u. - 0.00 ... 30.00 Inom 0.01 n)o)
07 42 OMEAS: Voltage C-G prim. - 0.0 ... 999.9 kV 0.1 n)o)07 43 OMEAS: Voltage C-G p.u. - 0.00 ... 1.00 Vnom 0.01 n)o)07 44 OMEAS: Voltage C-A prim. - 0.0 ... 999.9 kV 0.1 n)o)07 45 OMEAS: Voltage C-A p.u. - 0.00 ... 2.00 Vnom 0.01 n)o)
04 74 OMEAS: Auxiliary address For internal use 0.001 n)o)
04 93 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use04 94 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use04 95 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use04 96 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use04 97 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use04 98 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use04 99 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use09 61 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use09 62 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use09 63 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use09 99 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 185
C 2.2 State Signals
C 2.2.1 Functions
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
03 26 MAIN: Deactivate prot.EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes03 27 MAIN: Activate prot. EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes03 28 MAIN: Prot. ext.activated - 0 / 1 no / yes04 60 MAIN: Protect. not ready - 0 / 1 no / yes04 61 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes04 62 I>SIG: Overcurrent - 0 / 1 no / yes04 63 MAIN: Ground fault - 0 / 1 no / yes04 64 PSIG: Telecom. faulty EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes04 65 MAIN: Blocked/faulty - 0 / 1 no / yes09 35 GFDSS: Direct. forw./LS - 0 / 1 no / yes09 36 GFDSS: Direct. backw./BS - 0 / 1 no / yes09 37 GFDSS: tVN-G> elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes09 38 GFDSS: GF curr. meas. - 0 / 1 no / yes15 08 PSIG: Enabled - 0 / 1 no / yes21 13 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked - 0 / 1 no / yes35 00 FREC: Fault occurence - 0 / 1 no / yes35 01 FREC: Signal mem.overflow - 0 / 1 no / yes35 02 FREC: Faulty time tag - 0 / 1 no / yes36 00 START: General starting - 0 / 1 no / yes36 01 START: Starting A - 0 / 1 no / yes36 02 START: Starting B - 0 / 1 no / yes36 03 START: Starting C - 0 / 1 no / yes36 04 START: Starting GF - 0 / 1 no / yes36 05 MAIN: General trip signal - 0 / 1 no / yes36 09 DIST: Trip signal - 0 / 1 no / yes36 13 BUOC: Starting - 0 / 1 no / yes36 14 BUOC: Trip signal - 0 / 1 no / yes36 15 START: VN-G>> triggered - 0 / 1 no / yes36 16 START: tVN-G>> elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes36 17 CBF: CB failure - 0 / 1 no / yes36 18 DIST: Fault forward /LS - 0 / 1 no / yes36 19 DIST: Fault backward /BS - 0 / 1 no / yes36 20 PSIG: t1 revers.interlock - 0 / 1 no / yes36 21 START: Zero sequ. start. - 0 / 1 no / yes36 26 DIST: t1 elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes36 27 DIST: t2 elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes36 28 DIST: t3 elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes36 29 DIST: t4 elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes36 30 DIST: t5 elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes36 31 DIST: t6 elapsed - 0 / 1 no / yes36 34 CBF: Input EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 35 PSIG: Send (signal) - 0 / 1 no / yes36 38 PSIG: Test telecom. EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 45 MAIN: Trip cmd. block EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 46 DIST: Zone extension EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 47 SOTF: Manual close EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 48 PSIG: Receive EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 49 PSIG: Blocking EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 51 MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 60 PSIG: Telecom. faulty - 0 / 1 no / yes36 63 SOTF: tManual-close runn. - 0 / 1 no / yes36 64 SOTF: Trip aft. man.close - 0 / 1 no / yes36 65 DIST: Zone extension - 0 / 1 no / yes36 66 CBF: tCBF running - 0 / 1 no / yes36 69 MON: Trip by Ineg - 0 / 1 no / yes36 70 MON: Warning - 0 / 1 no / yes36 71 MAIN: General trip cmd. - 0 / 1 no / yes36 88 FLOC: Trigger EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes36 89 FREC: Trigger EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes37 18 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes37 20 MON: Measuring circ.mon. - 0 / 1 no / yes37 21 BUOC: Backup DTOC mode - 0 / 1 no / yes37 24 PSIG: Send (transm.relay) - 0 / 1 no / yes
C Address List(continued)
186 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
37 27 PSIG: Ready - 0 / 1 no / yes37 28 PSIG: Not ready - 0 / 1 no / yes37 29 PSIG: Receive & gen.start - 0 / 1 no / yes37 30 PASS: Output 1 (updating) - 0 / 1 no / yes37 31 PASS: Output 2 (updating) - 0 / 1 no / yes37 34 PASS: Output 1 (latching) - 0 / 1 no / yes37 35 PASS: Output 2 (latching) - 0 / 1 no / yes37 70 PC/ILSA: Test mode EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes37 71 PC/ILSA: Test mode - 0 / 1 no / yes37 72 ILSA: Command enable EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes37 73 ILSA: Command enable - 0 / 1 no / yes37 74 ILSA: Sig./meas.block EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes37 75 ILSA: Sig./meas.block - 0 / 1 no / yes37 76 FREC: Trigger - 0 / 1 no / yes38 06 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use38 07 PSIG: Trip signal - 0 / 1 no / yes38 16 MAIN: Starting trig. EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes38 20 GFDSS: GF evaluation EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes38 23 MON: Volt. meas. circuits - 0 / 1 no / yes38 24 MON: Peripheral fault - 0 / 1 no / yes38 26 GFDSS: GFD ready - 0 / 1 no / yes38 27 GFDSS: GFD not ready - 0 / 1 no / yes38 28 GFDSS: GF ready - 0 / 1 no / yes38 29 GFDSS: GF not ready - 0 / 1 no / yes38 37 DIST: Fault in cable run - 0 / 1 no / yes38 46 MAIN: Prot. ext.disabled - 0 / 1 no / yes38 48 MON: Meas.volt. ok - 0 / 1 no / yes40 16 PASS: Input 1 EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes40 17 PASS: Input 2 EXT - 0 / 1 no / yes40 20 PASS: Output 1 (t) - 0 / 1 no / yes
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 187
C 2.2.2 Binary Inputs
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
54 00 INP: State U 1 - 0 / 1 "low" / "high"54 03 INP: State U 2 - 0 / 1 "low" / "high"
C 2.2.3 Binary Outputs
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
51 00 OUTP: State K 1 - 0 / 1 inactive/active51 02 OUTP: State K 2 - 0 / 1 inactive/active51 04 OUTP: State K 3 - 0 / 1 inactive/active51 06 OUTP: State K 4 - 0 / 1 inactive/active51 08 OUTP: State K 5 - 0 / 1 inactive/active51 10 OUTP: State K 6 - 0 / 1 inactive/active51 12 OUTP: State K 7 - 0 / 1 inactive/active51 14 OUTP: State K 8 - 0 / 1 inactive/active
C 2.2.4 LED Indicators
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
57 00 LED: State H 1 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 02 LED: State H 2 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 04 LED: State H 3 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 06 LED: State H 4 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 08 LED: State H 5 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 10 LED: State H 6 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 12 LED: State H 7 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 14 LED: State H 8 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 16 LED: State H 9 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 18 LED: State H 10 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 20 LED: State H 11 - 0 / 1 inactive / active57 22 LED: State H 12 - 0 / 1 inactive / active
C Address List(continued)
188 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
C 2.3 Control and Testing
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
00 85 MAIN: Cold restart off 0 0 / 1 no / yes p)03 02 MAIN: General reset on 0 0 / 1 no / yes p)
03 03 GFDSS: Reset meas. values on 0 0 / 1 Reset: 2x E key03 04 GFDSS: Reset counter on 0 0 / 1 Reset: 2x E Key03 06 FREC: Reset sig. memory on 0 0 ... 9999 Reset: 2x E Key 103 08 MON: Reset mon. sig. mem. on 0 0 ... 30 Reset: 2x E Key 1
03 10 LOC: Param. change enabl. on 0 0 / 1 no / yes03 39 MAIN: Warm restart off 0 0 / 1 no / yes03 40 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes p)03 41 FREC: Triggering USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
03 42 OUTP: Relay assign.f.test off - - without function5101 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 15103 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 25105 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 35107 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 45109 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 55111 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 65113 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 75115 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 8
03 43 OUTP: Relay test off 0 0 / 1 no / yes p)
03 44 OUTP: Hold-time for test on 1 1 ... 10 s 1
09 60 MAIN: Auxiliary address For internal use
15 09 PSIG: Test telecom. USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes21 10 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER on 0 0 / 1 no / yes
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 189
C 2.4 Monitoring Signals
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
03 01 MON: Mon. signal memory on E--- Entry into memory 1
Possible Entries
90 00 MON: EPROM - 12 R/W error segm. C000 hex 13 R/W error segm. D000 hex 14 R/W error segm. E000 hex 15 R/W error segm. F000 hex
90 01 MON: RAM - 0 R/W error segm. 0000 hex 1 R/W error segm. 1000 hex 2 R/W error segm. 2000 hex 3 R/W error segm. 3000 hex 4 R/W error NOVRAM
90 02 MON: Exception - 0 Undefined op-code 1 Division error 2 Undefined interrupt 3 RMX exception 4 Prot. NMI not active 5 Fault semaphore blocked
90 03 MON: Parameters - 1 Checksum error90 08 MON: PC interface - 1 SCC error90 09 MON: ILSA interface - 1 SCC error90 10 MON: Battery Common-RAM - 8 Low voltage90 12 MON: Monitor sig. memory - 9 Overflow
90 13 MON: Signal memory - 2 Checksum error 3 Fault record lost 4 Fault record lost
90 14 MON: Monitor sig. memory - 3 Checksum error90 16 MON: PC interface - 2 Time-out90 17 MON: PC interface - 0 Long telegram bef. norm.90 18 MON: PC interface - 0 Unknown status telegram90 21 MON: Operat. watchdog - 7 Reset90 25 MON: NMI - 1 NMI late90 27 MON: Clock - 3 Time control error
90 28 MON: Cold restart - 0 Parameter loss 1 EPROM exchange 2 RAM without battery
90 31 MON: ILSA interface - 0 Invalid telegram recept.90 32 MON: ILSA interface - 0 Unknown addr. at scan90 33 MON: ILSA interface - 0 Unknown addr.at cont.scan90 34 MON: Spontan. sig.buffer - 0 Wrong data type90 35 MON: Spontan. sig.buffer - 0 Buffer overflow90 36 MON: ILSA/PC telegram - 0 Unknown data type field90 37 MON: ILSA interface - 0 Unknown status telegram90 42 MON: Common-RAM - 0 Unknown fault90 43 MON: ILSA/PC interface - 0 Error for general reject.
90 70 MON: Checksum - 1 Local checksum 2 Local total checksum 3 Param. comp. local-global
94 02 MON: Clock - 1 Hardware failure
98 00 MON: Voltage meas. VLS - 1 M.c.b. tripped98 01 MON: Volt.meas.circuits - 2 Voltage unbalance
98 02 MON: Backup DTOC - 3 Without DTOC98 03 MON: Backup DTOC - 4 With DTOC
C Address List(continued)
190 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
98 05 MON: Curr. meas.circuits - 6 Current unbalance98 06 MON: Protect.sig.transm. - 7 Telecom. faulty98 07 MON: Measuring circuits - 8 Zero sequ. start.98 09 MON: Low voltage - 1 Ext. error low voltage
Cold / Warm Start
99 00 MON: Initialization - 0 RAM segment 0000 hex 1 RAM segment 1000 hex 2 RAM segment 2000 hex 3 RAM segment 3000 hex 4 NOVRAM 8 EPROM segment C000 hex 9 EPROM segment D000 hex 10 EPROM segment E000 hex 11 EPROM segment F000 hex 12 Activate operating system 13 Init.test of oper. system 14 Power failure 30 Wrong SW version oper.sys 31 Wrong SW version 43 Wrong clock
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 191
C 3 Events
C 3.1 Event Counters
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
04 00 MAIN: No. general start. on 0 0 ... 9999 Reset: 2x E Key 1 o)04 05 MAIN: No. trip cmds on 0 0 ... 9999 Reset: 2x E Key 1 o)
04 10 FREC: No. system disturb. - 0 0 ... 9999 Reset via 03 06 1
04 19 MON: No. of mon.signals - 0 0 ... 30 Reset via 03 08 1 o)
04 20 FREC: No. of faults - 0 0 ... 9999 Reset via 03 06 1
09 00 GFDSS: No. GF forwd./LS on 0 0 ... 9999 Reset: 2 x E key 1 o)09 01 GFDSS: No. GF backwd./BS on 0 0 ... 9999 Reset: 2 x E key 1 o)09 02 GFDSS: No. GF steady-st. on 0 0 ... 9999 Reset: 2 x E key 1 o)09 03 GFDSS: No. of GFs (curr.) on 0 0 ... 9999 Reset: 2 x E key 1 o)
C Address List(continued)
192 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
C 3.2 Measured Fault Data
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
04 21 FMEAS: Operating time - 0.00 ... 65.00 s 0.01 n)o)
04 22 FLOC: Fault location - 0.0 ... 500.0 Ref. unit line length 0.1 n)o)
04 23 FMEAS: Fault impedance - 0.00 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.0110.00 ... 200.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.100.000 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.0022.00 ... 40.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
04 24 FMEAS: Fault loop angle - -180 ... 180 ° 1 n)o)04 25 FMEAS: Fault current p.u. - 0.00 ... 99.99 Inom 0.01 n)o)04 26 FMEAS: Fault voltage p.u. - 0.000 ... 2.000 Vnom 0.001 n)o)
04 27 FLOC: Fault location % - 0.0 ... 200.0 % Refer.value / reactance 0.1 n)o)
04 28 FMEAS: Fault reactance - 0.00 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.01- 10.00 ... 200.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.10
0.000 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.0022.00 ... 40.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
04 29 FMEAS: Fault react. prim. - 0.00 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.0110.00 ... 490.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.100.000 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.0022.00 ... 98.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
04 37 FMEAS: Load impedance - 0.00 ... 9.990 � at Inom = 1 A 0.01- 10.00 ... 200.0 � at Inom = 1 A 0.10
0.000 ... 1.998 � at Inom = 5 A 0.0022.00 ... 40.00 � at Inom = 5 A 0.020
04 38 FMEAS: Load angle - -180 ... 180 ° 1 n)o)04 39 FMEAS: Residual current - 0.00 ... 99.99 Inom 0.01 n)o)
04 48 FMEAS: GF angle - -180 ... 180 ° 1 n)o)04 49 FMEAS: Fault IN p.u. - 0.00 ... 99.99 Inom 0.01 n)o)
09 20 GMEAS: Voltage VN-G p.u. - 0.000 ... 1.500 Vnom/�3 0.001 n)o)
09 21 GMEAS: Current IN p.u. - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)09 22 GMEAS: Curr. IN,act p.u. - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)09 23 GMEAS: Curr.IN,reac p.u. - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)
09 24 GMEAS: GF durat.steady-st - 0.0 ... 999.9 min 0.1 n)o)
09 25 GMEAS: IN filtered p.u. - 0.000 ... 9.999 Inom 0.001 n)o)
09 26 GMEAS: GF durat.curr.meas - 0.0 ... 999.9 min 0.1 n)o)
C Address List(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 193
C 3.3 Fault Signals
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
03 00 FREC: Signal memory on ---L Entry into memory
Possible Entries
03 28 MAIN: Prot. ext.activated - 0 / 1 end/start03 40 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER - 0 / 1 end/start p)03 41 FREC: Triggering USER - 0 / 1 end/start03 80 PC: Command enabling - 0 / 1 end/start03 86 PC: Sig./meas. val.block. - 0 / 1 end/start03 93 FREC: Time (milliseconds) - ms 103 94 FREC: Time (seconds) - s 103 96 FREC: Time of day - hh:mm 0.0103 97 FREC: Date - dd.mm 0.0103 98 FREC: Year - 104 20 FREC: No. of faults - 104 21 FMEAS: Operating time - s 0.01 n)o)04 22 FLOC: Fault location - Ref. unit line length 0.1 n)o)04 23 FMEAS: Fault impedance �04 24 FMEAS: Fault loop angle - ° 1 n)o)04 25 FMEAS: Fault current p.u. - Inom 0.01 n)o)04 26 FMEAS: Fault voltage p.u. - Vnom 0.001 n)o)04 27 FLOC: Fault location % - % Refer.value / reactance 0.1 n)o)04 28 FMEAS: Fault reactance �04 29 FMEAS: Fault react. prim. �04 60 MAIN: Protect. not ready - 0 / 1 end/start04 61 MAIN: M.c.b. trip VLS EXT - 0 / 1 end/start04 62 I>SIG: Overcurrent - 0 / 1 end/start04 63 MAIN: Ground fault - 0 / 1 end/start04 64 PSIG: Telecom. faulty EXT - 0 / 1 end/start04 65 MAIN: Blocked/faulty - 0 / 1 end/start09 35 GFDSS: Direct. forw./LS - 0 / 1 end/start09 36 GFDSS: Direct. backw./BS - 0 / 1 end/start09 37 GFDSS: tVN-G> elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start09 38 GFDSS: GF curr. meas. - 0 / 1 end/start15 08 PSIG: Enabled - 0 / 1 end/start15 09 PSIG: Test telecom. USER - 0 / 1 end/start21 12 MAIN: Trip cmd.block USER - 0 / 1 end/start21 13 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked - 0 / 1 end/start35 00 FREC: Fault occurence - 0 / 1 end/start35 01 FREC: Signal mem.overflow - 0 / 1 end/start36 00 START: General starting - 0 / 1 end/start36 01 START: Starting A - 0 / 1 end/start36 02 START: Starting B - 0 / 1 end/start36 03 START: Starting C - 0 / 1 end/start36 04 START: Starting GF - 0 / 1 end/start36 05 MAIN: General trip signal - 0 / 1 end/start36 09 DIST: Trip signal - 0 / 1 end/start36 13 BUOC: Starting - 0 / 1 end/start36 14 BUOC: Trip signal - 0 / 1 end/start36 15 START: VN-G>> triggered - 0 / 1 end/start36 16 START: tVN-G>> elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start36 17 CBF: CB failure - 0 / 1 end/start36 18 DIST: Fault forward /LS - 0 / 1 end/start36 19 DIST: Fault backward /BS - 0 / 1 end/start36 20 PSIG: t1 revers.interlock - 0 / 1 end/start36 21 START: Zero sequ. start. - 0 / 1 end/start36 26 DIST: t1 elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start36 27 DIST: t2 elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start36 28 DIST: t3 elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start36 29 DIST: t4 elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start36 30 DIST: t5 elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start36 31 DIST: t6 elapsed - 0 / 1 end/start36 34 CBF: Input EXT - 0 / 1 end/start36 35 PSIG: Send (signal) - 0 / 1 end/start36 45 MAIN: Trip cmd. block EXT - 0 / 1 end/start36 46 DIST: Zone extension EXT - 0 / 1 end/start36 47 SOTF: Manual close EXT - 0 / 1 end/start
C Address List(continued)
194 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
Addressx y
Description Change Default Range of Values Unit or Meaning Incre-ment
36 48 PSIG: Receive EXT - 0 / 1 end/start36 49 PSIG: Blocking EXT - 0 / 1 end/start36 51 MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT - 0 / 1 end/start36 60 PSIG: Telecom. faulty - 0 / 1 end/start36 63 SOTF: tManual-close runn. - 0 / 1 end/start36 64 SOTF: Trip aft. man.close - 0 / 1 end/start36 65 DIST: Zone extension - 0 / 1 end/start36 66 CBF: tCBF running - 0 / 1 end/start36 69 MON: Trip by Ineg - 0 / 1 end/start36 70 MON: Warning - 0 / 1 end/start36 71 MAIN: General trip cmd. - 0 / 1 end/start36 88 FLOC: Trigger EXT - 0 / 1 end/start36 89 FREC: Trigger EXT - 0 / 1 end/start37 18 MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT - 0 / 1 end/start37 20 MON: Measuring circ.mon. - 0 / 1 end/start37 21 BUOC: Backup DTOC mode - 0 / 1 end/start37 28 PSIG: Not ready - 0 / 1 end/start37 29 PSIG: Receive & gen.start - 0 / 1 end/start37 70 PC/ILSA: Test mode EXT - 0 / 1 end/start37 71 PC/ILSA: Test mode - 0 / 1 end/start37 72 ILSA: Command enable EXT - 0 / 1 end/start37 73 ILSA: Command enable - 0 / 1 end/start37 74 ILSA: Sig./meas.block EXT - 0 / 1 end/start37 75 ILSA: Sig./meas.block - 0 / 1 end/start38 07 PSIG: Trip signal - 0 / 1 end/start38 16 MAIN: Starting trig. EXT - 0 / 1 end/start38 20 GFDSS: GF evaluation EXT - 0 / 1 end/start38 23 MON: Volt. meas. circuits - 0 / 1 end/start38 24 MON: Peripheral fault - 0 / 1 end/start38 27 GFDSS: GFD not ready - 0 / 1 end/start38 29 GFDSS: GF not ready - 0 / 1 end/start38 37 DIST: Fault in cable run - 0 / 1 end/start38 48 MON: Meas.volt. ok - 0 / 1 end/start40 16 PASS: Input 1 EXT - 0 / 1 end/start40 17 PASS: Input 2 EXT - 0 / 1 end/start40 20 PASS: Output 1 (t) - 0 / 1 end/start
D Set Value Record Sheets
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 195
Serial No. 6.
Order No. 89521-0-
Diagram No. 89521.
Nominal Device Data
Inom A AC
Vnom V AC
VA,nom V DC
fnom Hz
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
196
D 1 Device Identification
D 1.1 Ordering Information
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
00 80 IDENT: Add. HW modules
00 00 IDENT: Device type 521 PD 521
00 48 IDENT: Device password 1
00 49 IDENT: Device password 2
00 50 IDENT: Auxiliary voltage V
00 51 IDENT: Nominal voltage V
00 52 IDENT: Nominal current A
00 53 IDENT: Nominal frequency Hz
00 54 IDENT: Nominal current IN A
D 1.2 Design Version
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
02 00 IDENT: Data model 100 Version number
02 20 IDENT: SW version 1.0x Version number
02 60 IDENT: Auxiliary address For internal use
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 197
D 2 Configuration Parameters
D 2.1 Control Interfaces
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
03 11 LOC: Access lock active
03 12 PC/ILSA: Test mode USER
03 13 LOC: Autom. return addr. xxyy
03 14 LOC: Autom. return time s
03 50 ILSA: Delta V %Vnom
03 51 ILSA: Delta I %Inom
03 52 ILSA: Delta f %fnom
03 53 ILSA: Delta t min
03 54 ILSA: Delta P %Snom
03 55 PC: Delta V %Vnom
03 56 PC: Delta I %Inom
03 57 PC: Delta f %fnom
03 58 PC: Delta t min
03 59 PC: Delta P %Snom
03 68 PC/ILSA: Device addr.(CU) } must be set
03 69 PC/ILSA: Device addr.(PU) } identical
03 70 ILSA: Command enable USER
03 71 ILSA: Baud rate Baud
03 74 ILSA: Transm. cycl. data
03 76 ILSA: Sig./meas.blck.USER
03 77 ILSA: Contin.general scan s
03 80 PC: Command enabling
03 81 PC: Baud rate Baud
03 84 PC: Transm. cycl. data
03 86 PC: Sig./meas. val.block
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
198
D 2.2 Binary Inputs
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
54 01 INP: Fct. assignm. U 1
54 04 INP: Fct. assignm. U 2
54 02 INP: Operating mode U 1
54 05 INP: Operating mode U 2
D 2.3 Binary Outputs
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
51 01 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1
51 03 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2
51 05 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 3
51 07 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 4
51 09 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 5
51 11 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 6
51 13 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 7
51 15 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 8
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 199
D 2.4 LED Indicators
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
57 01 LED: Fct. assignm. H 1 36.70 MON: Warning
57 03 LED: Fct. assignm. H 2 03.31 MAIN: Operation
57 05 LED: Fct. assignm. H 3 04.65 MAIN: Blocked/faulty
57 07 LED: Fct. assignm. H 4
57 09 LED: Fct. assignm. H 5
57 11 LED: Fct. assignm. H 6
57 13 LED: Fct. assignm. H 7
57 15 LED: Fct. assignm. H 8
57 17 LED: Fct. assignm. H 9
57 19 LED: Fct. assignm. H 10
57 21 LED: Fct. assignm. H 11
57 23 LED: Fct. assignm. H 12
D 3 Function Parameters
D 3.1 Global
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
03 30 MAIN: Protection active
10 03 MAIN: Nominal current
10 04 MAIN: Connect. meas.curr.
10 30 MAIN: System Frequency
10 40 MAIN: Transfer for 1p
10 41 MAIN: Phase priority 2pN
10 48 MAIN: Neutral-point treat
10 49 MAIN: Rotary field
21 12 MAIN: Trip cmd.block USER
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
200
D 3.2 Main Functions
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
Starting
10 36 START: tI>> s
10 50 START: Xfw �
10 51 START: Rfw P-G �
10 52 START: Rfw P-P �
10 53 START: Zbw/Zfw
10 54 START: I>> Inom
10 55 START: IN> Inom
10 56 START: VN-G> Vnom/�3
10 57 START: tIN> s
10 60 START: Trip tVN-G>>
10 61 START: tVN-G>> s
10 62 START: VN-G>> Vnom/�3
10 63 START: � °
10 67 START: Operating mode
10 68 START: I> (Imin) Inom
10 69 START: V< Vnom or Vnom/�3
25 93 START: Z evaluation
Distance measurement
12 00 DIST: Zone 4
12 01 DIST: X1 (polygon) �
12 02 DIST: X2 (polygon) �
12 03 DIST: X3 (polygon) �
12 04 DIST: X4 (polygon) �
12 05 DIST: R1 P-G (polygon) �
12 06 DIST: R1 P-P (polygon) �
12 07 DIST: R2 P-G (polygon) �
12 08 DIST: R2 P-P (polygon) �
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 201
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
12 09 DIST: R3 P-G (polygon) �
12 10 DIST: R3 P-P (polygon) �
12 11 DIST: R4 P-G (polygon) �
12 12 DIST: R4 P-P (polygon) �
12 13 DIST: � (polygon) °
12 23 DIST: Direction N1
12 24 DIST: Direction N2
12 25 DIST: Direction N3
12 26 DIST: Direction N4
12 27 DIST: Direction N5
12 28 DIST: t1 s
12 29 DIST: t2 s
12 30 DIST: t3 s
12 31 DIST: t4 s
12 32 DIST: t5 s
12 33 DIST: t6 s
12 34 DIST: kze P-G HSR
12 35 DIST: kze P-P HSR
12 36 DIST: kG angle
12 37 DIST: kG abs. value
12 38 DIST: Arc comp. (circle)
12 40 DIST: Characteristic
12 41 DIST: � (circle) °
12 42 DIST: Z1 (circle) �
12 43 DIST: Z2 (circle) �
12 44 DIST: Z3 (circle) �
12 45 DIST: Z4 (circle) �
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
202
D 3.3 Supplementary Functions
Operating Value Measurement
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
10 01 OMEAS: Inom,prim. C.T. A
10 02 OMEAS: Vnom,prim. V.T. kV
Pass-Through Functions
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
17 21 PASS: tEM1 s
17 30 PASS: Op. mode tEM1
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 203
Ground Fault Direction Determination
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
16 60 GFDSS: Enabled
16 61 GFDSS: tVN-G> s
16 62 GFDSS: VN-G> Vnom
16 63 GFDSS: Operating mode
16 64 GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac Inom
16 65 GFDSS: Sector angle LS °
16 66 GFDSS: Operate delay LS s
16 67 GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac Inom
16 68 GFDSS: Sector angle BS °
16 69 GFDSS: Operate delay BS s
16 70 GFDSS: Connect.meas.curr.
16 71 GFDSS: Common reset
16 72 GFDSS: Release delay LS s
16 73 GFDSS: Release delay BS s
16 90 GFDSS: Select GFD/GF
16 91 GFDSS: f0 (GFD) Hz
16 92 GFDSS: f0 (GF) Hz
16 93 GFDSS: IN> Inom
16 94 GFDSS: Operate delay IN s
16 95 GFDSS: Release delay IN s
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
204
Fault Localization
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
10 05 FLOC: Line length
10 11 FLOC: Start determination
10 12 FLOC: Line reactance �
Overcurrent (I>) Signal
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
14 04 I>SIG: Thresh. value DTOC Inom
14 08 I>SIG: t s
CB-Failure Protection
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
11 67 CBF: tCBF s
Back-up Protection
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
14 00 BUOC: Operating mode
17 00 BUOC: I> Inom
17 03 BUOC: IN> Inom
17 04 BUOC: tI> s
17 08 BUOC: tIN> s
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
D Set Value Record Sheets(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 205
Fault Recording
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
03 78 FREC: Pre-fault time ms
03 79 FREC: Post-fault time ms
03 95 FREC: Time-switching
03 96 FREC: Time of day hh:mm
03 97 FREC: Date dd.mm
03 98 FREC: Year
Protective Signaling
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
15 00 PSIG: Operating mode
15 02 PSIG: Reset time send s
15 03 PSIG: Echo on receive
15 04 PSIG: Enabled USER
15 11 PSIG: Tripping time s
15 12 PSIG: DC loop op. mode
Self-monitoring
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
03 15 MON: Peripheral fault
14 01 MON: Meas.circuit mon.
14 02 MON: Threshold value Ineg
14 03 MON: Trip by Ineg
14 07 MON: Meas. volt. circuit
Switch on to Fault Protection
Addressx y
Description Range of values Unit or Meaning
11 60 SOTF: Manual close timer s
11 61 SOTF: Operating mode
E Terminal Connection Diagrams
206 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
111 Terminal connection diagram for PD521 version -302 -401 -602, diagram 89521.401 part 1 of 2
E Terminal Connection Diagrams(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 207
112 Terminal connection diagram for PD521 version -302 -401 -602, diagram 89521.401 part 2 of 2
E Terminal Connection Diagrams
208 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
113 Terminal connection diagram for PD521 version -303 -402 -602, diagram 89521.402 part 1 of 2
E Terminal Connection Diagrams(continued)
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 209
114 Terminal connection diagram for PD521 version -303 -402 -602, diagram 89521.402 part 2 of 2
210 89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN
89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN 211
This operating manual is drafted according to our experience and is composed conscientiously. If nevertheless youstill find any mistakes in it, please tell us by this enclosed form. We are also grateful for your further hints andimprovement proposals.
Operating Manual "PD 521 Distance Protection Device"Publication ID No. "89521-302/-303-401/-402-602 / AFSV.12.06470 EN"
Hints:
Sender
Address: Phone:
Fax:
ALSTOM Energietechnik GmbHBereich Schutz- und SchaltanlagenleittechnikSystem ProtectionP. O. Box 71 01 07
D - 60491 Frankfurt
AFSV.12.06470/0500EN Printed in Germany Contents subject to change
Protection systems forpower generation,
ALSTOM Sales Offices withSystem Protection Specialists
transmission and distribution Argentina ALSTOM T&D S. A.Lavalle 3568 1603Villa MartelliP. de Buenos AiresPhone +541730-1800Fax +541730-1529
Hong Kong ALSTOM T&DProtection & ControlRm. 2006-7CC Wu Building302-308 Hennessy RoadWanchai, GPO Box 15Hong KongPhone +85228336265Fax +85228345279
Supervision equipment for themonitoring of ground faults,insulation, currents,
Australia ALSTOM T &D25 Princes Rd. POB 22Regents ParkNSW 2143Phone +61296450735Fax +61297438488
India ALSTOM India Ltd.Pallavaram works19/1, GST Road PallavaramMadras-600043Phone +91442368621Fax +91442367276
voltages, asymmetry,frequency and reverse power
Brazil ALSTOM T&DMASA SAProtection & ControlAv. Interlagos, 4211104661-300 Sao PauloPhone +55115241044Fax +55115483429
Poland ALSTOM T&DREFA S.A.Strzegomska 23/2758-160 SwiebodzicePhone +4874548410Fax +4874541632
Substation control andprotection systems
Canada ALSTOMSales Network Inc.5112 Timberlea Blvdl.MississaugaOntario L4W-2S5Phone +1905-6248300Fax +1905-6248855
South Africa ALSTOM35-37 Eleventh RoadKew, Johannesburg, 2090Phone +27118853240Fax +27118851100
England ALSTOM T&DProtection & Control LimitedSt Leonard WorksStafford ST174LXPhone +441785-223251Fax +441785-212232
Spain ALSTOMSales Network,S.A.Paseo de la Castellana,25728046 MadridPhone +341334.59.50Fax +341334.59.51
France ALSTOM T&DProtection & ContrôleAvenue de Figuières,B.P. 7534975 Lattes CedexPhone +3346720-5526Fax +3346720-5584
USA ALSTOM T&D4 Skyline DriveHawthorneNew York 10532-2160California 90034Phone +1-914347-5166Fax +1-914347-5508
08.99 aAddresses of more sales offices and countries on request
ALSTOM Energietechnik GmbHBereich Schutz- und
SchaltanlagenleittechnikLyoner Straße 44-48D-60528 FrankfurtPostfach 71 01 07D-60491 Frankfurt
Phone +49 69 66 32-15 21Fax +49 69 66 32-25 48
http://www.tde.alstom.com
ALSTOM Energietechnik GmbH · Energy Automation & InformationLyoner Straße 44-48 · 60528 Frankfurt · Postfach 71 01 07 · 60491 Frankfurt
Telefon (0 69) 66 32 - 33 33 · Telefax (0 69) 66 32 - 25 48www.tde.alstom.com
pcb-gee.germany@tde.alstom.com
top related